FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA 802.11 ac Unified Pro Access Point / 802.11ac Dual-Radio Nebula Cloud Managed Access Point / 802.11ac Dual-Radio Dual-Mount PoE Access Point

Users Guide NWA/WAC/WAX Series 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/ax Access Point Default Login Details LAN IP Address DHCP-assigned IP User Name Password OR 192.168.1.2 admin 1234 Version 6.00 Edition 1, 12/2019 Copyright 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. This is a Users Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product hardware, firmware, or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Some screens or options in this book may not be available for your product (see the product feature tables in Section 1.4 on page 19). Related Documentation Quick Start Guide CLI Reference Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Zyxel Device and access the Web Configurator. The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and CLI commands to configure the Zyxel Device. Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Zyxel Device. Web Configurator Online Help Nebula Control Center Users Guide Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information. This Users Guide shows how to manage the Zyxel Device remotely. The features of these devices can be managed through Nebula Control Center. It also offers features that are not available when the Zyxel Device is in standalone mode (see Section 2.1.2 on page 24). NXC Series Users Guide More Information See this Users Guide for instructions on using the NXC as an AP Controller (AC) for the Zyxel Device. This is used when the Zyxel Device is set to be managed by a Zyxel AC. Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 2 Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions All models in this series may be referred to as the Zyxel Device in this guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration >

Network > IP Setting means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the Network sub menu and finally the IP Setting tab to get to that screen. Icons Used in Figures Figures in this guide may use the following generic icons. The Zyxel Device icon is not an exact representation of your device. Zyxel Device Router Switch Internet Server Desktop Laptop AP Controller Printer Nebula Switch Nebula Gateway Smart T.V. IP Phone NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13 AP Management .................................................................................................................................. 24 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................... 33 The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 53 Standalone Configuration ................................................................................................................64 Standalone Configuration ................................................................................................................... 65 Dashboard ............................................................................................................................................ 67 Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 73 Monitor ................................................................................................................................................... 79 Network ................................................................................................................................................. 94 Wireless ................................................................................................................................................. 105 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................. 120 User ....................................................................................................................................................... 123 AP Profile .............................................................................................................................................. 130 MON Profile ......................................................................................................................................... 150 WDS Profile ........................................................................................................................................... 153 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 155 System .................................................................................................................................................. 171 Log and Report ................................................................................................................................... 194 File Manager ....................................................................................................................................... 206 Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................... 217 LEDs ...................................................................................................................................................... 219 Antenna Switch .................................................................................................................................. 222 Reboot ................................................................................................................................................. 224 Shutdown ............................................................................................................................................. 225 Local Configuration in Cloud Mode ..............................................................................................226 Cloud Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 227 Dashboard .......................................................................................................................................... 229 Network ............................................................................................................................................... 231 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 234 Appendices and Troubleshooting .................................................................................................239 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 240 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 4 Table of Contents Table of Contents Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3 Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Chapter 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................13 1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 13 1.2 Zyxel Device Roles .......................................................................................................................... 13 1.2.1 Root AP ................................................................................................................................... 14 1.2.2 Wireless Repeater .................................................................................................................. 14 1.2.3 Radio Frequency (RF) Monitor ............................................................................................. 15 1.3 Sample Feature Applications ........................................................................................................ 17 1.3.1 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................... 17 1.3.2 Dual-Radio ............................................................................................................................. 18 1.4 Zyxel Device Product Feature Comparison ................................................................................ 19 Chapter 2 AP Management................................................................................................................................24 2.1 Management Mode ...................................................................................................................... 24 2.1.1 Standalone ............................................................................................................................ 24 2.1.2 Nebula Control Center ......................................................................................................... 24 2.1.3 AP Controller (AC) ................................................................................................................ 26 2.2 Switching Management Modes ................................................................................................... 26 2.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility .................................................................................................... 27 2.3.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 27 2.3.2 Run the ZON Utility ................................................................................................................. 28 2.4 Ways to Access the Zyxel Device ................................................................................................. 31 2.5 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device ............................................................................. 32 Chapter 3 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................33 3.1 Grounding (WAC6552D-S and WAC6553D-E) ............................................................................. 33 3.2 Zyxel Device Models With Single LEDs .......................................................................................... 34 3.2.1 NWA1123-ACv2 ..................................................................................................................... 34 3.2.2 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD ................................................................................... 36 3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD ................................................................................................................... 37 3.2.4 NWA5123-AC ......................................................................................................................... 39 3.2.5 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S ................................................................................. 40 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 3.3 Zyxel Device Models With Multiple LEDs ...................................................................................... 42 3.3.1 NWA1123-AC PRO ................................................................................................................ 42 3.3.2 NWA1302-AC ......................................................................................................................... 44 3.3.3 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S ................................................................ 46 3.3.4 WAC6103D-I ........................................................................................................................... 48 3.3.5 WAC5302D-S .......................................................................................................................... 50 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................53 4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 53 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................................. 53 4.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ............................................................................................... 55 4.3.1 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................... 56 4.3.2 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 58 4.3.3 Standalone Mode Navigation Panel Menus ..................................................................... 58 4.3.4 Cloud Mode Navigation Panel Menus ............................................................................... 60 4.3.5 Tables and Lists ...................................................................................................................... 61 Part I: Standalone Configuration ................................................................... 64 Chapter 5 Standalone Configuration.................................................................................................................65 5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 65 5.2 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device ...................................................................................... 65 Chapter 6 Dashboard ..........................................................................................................................................67 6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 67 6.1.1 CPU Usage ............................................................................................................................. 70 6.1.2 Memory Usage ...................................................................................................................... 71 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard.......................................................................................................................................73 7.1 Accessing the Wizard ..................................................................................................................... 73 7.2 Using the Wizard ............................................................................................................................. 73 7.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings .............................................................................................................. 73 7.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection ........................................................................... 74 7.2.3 Step 3 Radio ......................................................................................................................... 75 7.2.4 Step 4 SSID ............................................................................................................................. 76 7.2.5 Summary ............................................................................................................................... 78 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 6 Table of Contents Chapter 8 Monitor ................................................................................................................................................79 8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 79 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 79 8.2 What You Need to Know ............................................................................................................... 79 8.3 Network Status ................................................................................................................................ 80 8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph .............................................................................................................. 81 8.4 Radio List ......................................................................................................................................... 82 8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information ................................................................................................ 84 8.5 Station List ....................................................................................................................................... 86 8.6 WDS Link Info ................................................................................................................................... 87 8.7 Detected Device ........................................................................................................................... 88 8.8 View Log .......................................................................................................................................... 91 Chapter 9 Network...............................................................................................................................................94 9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 94 9.1.1 AP Controller Management ................................................................................................ 94 9.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 96 9.2 IP Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 97 9.3 VLAN ................................................................................................................................................ 98 9.4 Storm Control ................................................................................................................................ 101 9.5 AC (AP Controller) Discovery ...................................................................................................... 102 9.6 NCC Discovery .............................................................................................................................. 103 Chapter 10 Wireless .............................................................................................................................................105 10.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 105 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 105 10.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 106 10.2 AP Management ........................................................................................................................ 106 10.3 Rogue AP ..................................................................................................................................... 109 10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List ............................................................................................ 113 10.4 Load Balancing .......................................................................................................................... 114 10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections .................................................................... 115 10.5 DCS .............................................................................................................................................. 116 10.6 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 117 Chapter 11 Bluetooth...........................................................................................................................................120 11.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 120 11.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 120 11.2 Bluetooth Advertising Settings ................................................................................................... 121 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 11.2.1 Edit Advertising Settings ................................................................................................... 121 Chapter 12 User....................................................................................................................................................123 12.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 123 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 123 12.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 123 12.2 User Summary .............................................................................................................................. 124 12.2.1 Add/Edit User ..................................................................................................................... 124 12.3 Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 126 12.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings ...................................................................... 128 Chapter 13 AP Profile ...........................................................................................................................................130 13.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 130 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 130 13.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 130 13.2 Radio ............................................................................................................................................ 131 13.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile ...................................................................................................... 132 13.3 SSID .............................................................................................................................................. 137 13.3.1 SSID List ............................................................................................................................... 137 13.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile ......................................................................................................... 139 13.4 Security List .................................................................................................................................. 141 13.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile ................................................................................................... 142 13.5 MAC Filter List .............................................................................................................................. 146 13.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile ............................................................................................... 146 13.6 Layer-2 Isolation List .................................................................................................................... 147 13.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile .................................................................................... 149 Chapter 14 MON Profile.......................................................................................................................................150 14.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 150 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 150 14.2 MON Profile ................................................................................................................................. 150 14.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile ....................................................................................................... 151 Chapter 15 WDS Profile ........................................................................................................................................153 15.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 153 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 153 15.2 WDS Profile ................................................................................................................................... 153 15.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile ........................................................................................................ 154 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 8 Table of Contents Chapter 16 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................155 16.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 155 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 155 16.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 155 16.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ...................................................................................................... 157 16.2 My Certificates ........................................................................................................................... 158 16.2.1 Add My Certificates .......................................................................................................... 159 16.2.2 Edit My Certificates ........................................................................................................... 161 16.2.3 Import Certificates ........................................................................................................... 164 16.3 Trusted Certificates ..................................................................................................................... 165 16.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates .................................................................................................... 166 16.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates ............................................................................................... 169 16.4 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 170 Chapter 17 System...............................................................................................................................................171 17.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 171 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 171 17.2 Host Name ................................................................................................................................... 171 17.3 Power Mode ................................................................................................................................ 172 17.4 Date and Time ........................................................................................................................... 173 17.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List ..................................................................................... 175 17.4.2 Time Server Synchronization ............................................................................................ 175 17.5 WWW Overview .......................................................................................................................... 176 17.5.1 Service Access Limitations ............................................................................................... 176 17.5.2 System Timeout .................................................................................................................. 176 17.5.3 HTTPS ................................................................................................................................... 177 17.5.4 Configuring WWW Service Control ................................................................................. 177 17.5.5 HTTPS Example ................................................................................................................... 178 17.6 SSH ............................................................................................................................................. 184 17.6.1 How SSH Works .................................................................................................................. 185 17.6.2 SSH Implementation on the Zyxel Device ...................................................................... 186 17.6.3 Requirements for Using SSH .............................................................................................. 186 17.6.4 Configuring SSH ................................................................................................................. 186 17.6.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH .............................................................................. 187 17.7 Telnet ........................................................................................................................................... 188 17.8 FTP ................................................................................................................................................ 189 17.9 SNMP ........................................................................................................................................... 190 17.9.1 Supported MIBs ................................................................................................................. 191 17.9.2 SNMP Traps ......................................................................................................................... 191 17.9.3 Configuring SNMP ............................................................................................................. 191 17.9.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile ...................................................................... 192 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 9 Table of Contents Chapter 18 Log and Report.................................................................................................................................194 18.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 194 18.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter .................................................................................. 194 18.2 Email Daily Report ....................................................................................................................... 194 18.3 Log Setting .................................................................................................................................. 196 18.3.1 Log Setting Screen ............................................................................................................ 197 18.3.2 Edit System Log Settings .................................................................................................. 198 18.3.3 Edit Remote Server ........................................................................................................... 202 18.3.4 Active Log Summary ....................................................................................................... 203 Chapter 19 File Manager ....................................................................................................................................206 19.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 206 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 206 19.1.2 What you Need to Know .................................................................................................. 206 19.2 Configuration File ....................................................................................................................... 207 19.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP ...................................................... 211 19.3 Firmware Package .................................................................................................................... 212 19.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP .......................................................................... 213 19.4 Shell Script ................................................................................................................................... 214 Chapter 20 Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................217 20.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 217 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 217 20.2 Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................. 217 Chapter 21 LEDs ...................................................................................................................................................219 21.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 219 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 219 21.2 Suppression Screen ................................................................................................................... 219 21.3 Locator Screen .......................................................................................................................... 220 Chapter 22 Antenna Switch ................................................................................................................................222 22.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 222 22.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 222 22.2 Antenna Switch Screen ............................................................................................................. 222 Chapter 23 Reboot...............................................................................................................................................224 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 10 Table of Contents 23.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 224 23.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 224 23.2 Reboot ......................................................................................................................................... 224 Chapter 24 Shutdown ..........................................................................................................................................225 24.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 225 24.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 225 24.2 Shutdown ..................................................................................................................................... 225 Part II: Local Configuration in Cloud Mode................................................ 226 Chapter 25 Cloud Mode .....................................................................................................................................227 25.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 227 25.2 Cloud Mode Web Configurator Screens ................................................................................. 227 Chapter 26 Dashboard ........................................................................................................................................229 Chapter 27 Network.............................................................................................................................................231 27.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 231 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 231 27.2 IP Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 231 27.3 VLAN ............................................................................................................................................ 233 Chapter 28 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................234 28.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 234 28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 234 28.2 Shell Script ................................................................................................................................... 234 28.3 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................. 235 28.4 View Log ...................................................................................................................................... 236 Part III: Appendices and Troubleshooting.................................................. 239 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................240 29.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 240 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED ................................................................................ 240 29.3 Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login ..................................................................... 241 29.4 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................... 245 29.5 WiFi Network ................................................................................................................................ 246 29.6 Resetting the Zyxel Device ........................................................................................................ 247 29.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help ......................................................................................... 248 Appendix A Importing Certificates ............................................................................................... 249 Appendix B IPv6............................................................................................................................... 273 Appendix C Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 281 Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 287 Index .................................................................................................................................................300 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 12 C H A P T E R 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview This Users Guide covers the models listed in the following table. They can be managed in one of the following methods: remote management through Nebula Control Center (NCC) or an AP Controller

(AC) such as the NXC, or local management in Standalone Mode. Each Zyxel Device runs in standalone mode by default, but it is recommended to use NCC management if it is available for your device. NCC, AC or Standalone

(NebulaFlex PRO) NCC or Standalone

(NebulaFlex) AC or Standalone NWA5123-AC HD NWA1123-ACv2 NWA5123-AC NWA1123-AC PRO WAC5302D-S NWA1123-AC HD NWA1302-AC NWA110AX WAC6103D-I WAC6303D-S WAC6502D-E WAC6502D-S WAC6503D-S WAC6552D-S WAC6553D-E WAX510D WAX650S For more information about Access Point (AP) management, see Section 2.1 on page 24. Use the Zyxel Device to set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax compatible devices in either 2.4GHz and 5GHz networks or both at the same time. When two or more APs are interconnected, this network is called a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). See Section 1.2.2 on page 14 for more information on root and repeater APs and how to set them up. 1.2 Zyxel Device Roles This section describes some of the different roles that your Zyxel Device can take up within a network. Not all roles are supported by all models (see Section 1.4 on page 19). The Zyxel Device can serve as a:

Access Point (AP) - This is used to allow wireless clients to connect to the Internet. Radio Frequency (RF) monitor - An RF monitor searches for rogue APs to help eliminate network threats if it supports monitor mode and rogue APs detection/containment. An RF monitor cannot simultaneously act as an AP. Root AP - A root AP connects to the gateway or switch through a wired Ethernet connection and has wireless repeaters connected to it to extend its range. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Wireless repeater - A wireless repeater wirelessly connects to a root AP and extends the networks wireless range. The following figure shows a network setup that uses these different roles to create a secure Wireless Distribution System (WDS). The root AP (Y) is connected to a network with Internet access and has a wireless repeater (X) connected to it to expand the wireless networks range. Clients (A, B, and C) can access the wired network through the wireless repeater and/or root AP. If a client (D) tries to set up his own AP (R) with weak security settings, the network becomes exposed to threats. The RF monitor (M) scans the area to detect all APs, which can help the network administrator discover these rogue APs and remove them or use the NXC to quarantine them. Figure 1 Sample Network Setup 1.2.1 Root AP In Root AP mode, you can have multiple SSIDs active for regular wireless connections and one SSID for the connection with a repeater (repeater SSID). Wireless clients can use either SSID to associate with the Zyxel Device in Root AP mode. A repeater must use the repeater SSID to connect to the Zyxel Device in Root AP mode. When the Zyxel Device is in Root AP mode, repeater security between the Zyxel Device and other repeaters is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section 10.2 on page 106 and Section 15.2 on page 153 for more details. Unless specified, the term security settings refers to the traffic between the wireless clients and the AP. At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the Zyxel Device only. 1.2.2 Wireless Repeater Using Repeater mode, your Zyxel Device can extend the range of the WLAN. In the figure below, the Zyxel Device in Repeater mode (Z) has a wireless connection to the Zyxel Device in Root AP mode (X) which is connected to a wired network and also has a wireless connection to another Zyxel Device in Repeater mode (Y) at the same time. Z and Y act as repeaters that forward traffic between associated NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 14 Chapter 1 Introduction wireless clients and the wired LAN. Clients A and B access the AP and the wired network behind the AP through repeaters Z and Y. Figure 2 Repeater Application When the Zyxel Device is in Repeater mode, repeater security between the Zyxel Device and other repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See Section 10.2 on page 106 and Section 15.2 on page 153 for more details. For NCC managed devices, you only need to enable AP Smart Mesh to automatically create wireless links between APs. See the NCC Users Guide for more details. To set up a WDS in standalone mode APs, do the following steps. You should already have the root AP set up (see the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections). 1 Go to Configuration > Object > WDS Profile in your root AP web configurator and click Add. 2 Enter a profile name, an SSID for the WDS, and a pre-shared key. 3 Do steps 1 and 2 for the wireless repeater using the same SSID and pre-shared key. 4 Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between the root and repeater Zyxel Devices is made. To set up a WDS in NXC managed Zyxel Devices, see the NXC Users Guide. 1.2.3 Radio Frequency (RF) Monitor The Zyxel Device can be set to work as an RF monitor to discover nearby Access Points. The information it obtains from other APs is used to tag possible rogue APs and quarantine them if the Zyxel Device is NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction managed by the NXC (see Section 2.1.3 on page 26). If the Zyxel Devices radio setting is set to MON Mode (RF Monitor mode), it will serve as a dedicated RF monitor and its AP clients are disconnected. The models that do not support MON Mode support Rogue AP Detection (see Section 10.3 on page 109). Rogue AP Detection allows the AP to scan all channels similar to MON Mode except that the Zyxel Device still works as an AP while it scans the environment for wireless signals. To see which Zyxel Devices support the RF Monitor feature, see Section 1.4 on page 19. The Zyxel Device in MON Mode scans a range of WiFi channels that you specify in a MON Profile, either in the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz band. To scan both bands, you need to set both radio 1 and radio 2 in MON Mode. Once a rogue AP is detected, the network administrator can manually change the network settings to limit its access to the network using its MAC address or have the device physically removed. If the Zyxel Device is managed by an NXC, the network administrator can also use Rogue AP Containment through the NXC. MON Mode in Standalone Mode To use an RF monitor in standalone mode, do the following steps:

2 4 2 4 1 Create a MON Profile in Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add. Specify a Channel dwell time to determine how long the RF monitor scans a specific channel before moving to the next one. To scan all 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz channels, select auto in Scan Channel Mode. Make sure that the Activate check box is selected and click OK. 3 Go to the Configuration > Wireless > AP Management screen and set Radio 1 OP Mode (2.4 GHz) and/or Radio 2 OP Mode (5 GHz) to MON Mode. Select the Radio 1(2) Profile that you created in the previous step. Make sure that the Radio 1(2) Activate check box is selected and click Apply. 5 Go to Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device to see a list of APs scanned by the RF monitor. 6 Select an AP or APs in the list and click Mark as Rogue AP or Mark as Friendly AP. MON Mode in NXC-Managed Zyxel Devices For NXC-managed Zyxel Devices, do the following steps in the NXC web configurator:

1 Create a MON Profile in CONFIGURATION > Object > MON Profile > Add. Specify a Channel dwell time to determine how long the RF monitor scans a specific channel before moving to the next one. To scan all 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz channels, select auto in Scan Channel Mode. Make sure that the Activate check box is selected and click OK. 3 Go to the CONFIGURATION > Wireless > AP Management > Mgmt. AP List > Edit screen and/or set Radio 1 OP Mode (2.4 GHz) and Radio 2 OP Mode (5 GHz) to MON Mode. Select the Radio 1(2) Profile that you created in the previous step. Select Override Group Radio Setting and click OK. 5 Go to MONITOR > Wireless > Detected Device to see a list of APs scanned by the RF monitor. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 16 Chapter 1 Introduction 6 7 Select an AP or APs in the list and click Mark as Rogue AP or Mark as Friendly AP. To quarantine a rogue AP, go to CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Rogue AP, select the APs you want to quarantine, and click Containment. Make sure the Enable Rogue AP Containment check box is selected, and click Apply. 1.3 Sample Feature Applications This section describes some possible scenarios and topologies that you can set up using your Zyxel Device. 1.3.1 MBSSID A Basic Service Set (BSS) is the set of devices forming a single wireless network (usually an access point and one or more wireless clients). The Service Set IDentifier (SSID) is the name of a BSS. In Multiple BSS

(MBSSID) mode, the Zyxel Device provides multiple virtual APs, each forming its own BSS and using its own individual SSID profile. You can configure multiple SSID profiles, and have all of them active at any one time. You can assign different wireless and security settings to each SSID profile. This allows you to compartmentalize groups of users, set varying access privileges, and prioritize network traffic to and from certain BSSs. To the wireless clients in the network, each SSID appears to be a different access point. As in any wireless network, clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security settings. For example, you might want to set up a wireless network in your office where Internet telephony (VoIP) users have priority. You also want a regular wireless network for standard users, as well as a guest wireless network for visitors. In the following figure, VoIP_SSID users have QoS priority, SSID01 is the wireless network for standard users, and Guest_SSID is the wireless network for guest users. In this example, the guest user is forbidden access to the wired Land Area Network (LAN) behind the AP and can access only the Internet. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 3 Multiple BSSs 1.3.2 Dual-Radio Some of the Zyxel Device models are equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can configure two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously. Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the effects of radio interference. You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 4 Dual-Radio Application 1.4 Zyxel Device Product Feature Comparison The following tables show the differences between each Zyxel Device model. Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA110A NWA1302-

NWA5123-

NWA5123-

WAC5302 ACV2 AC PRO AC HD X AC AC AC HD D-S IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz 5 GHz FEATURES Supported Wireless Standards Supported Frequency Bands Available Security Modes None WEP WPA2 None WEP WPA2 None WEP WPA2 WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX None WEP WPA2 None WEP WPA2 None WEP WPA2 None WEP WPA2 WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX Number of SSID Profiles Number of Wireless Radios 64 2 64 2 64 2 64 2 64 2 64 2 64 2 IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11ax None WEP WPA2 WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

MIX Enhanced-

open WPA3-

enterprise WPA3-

personal 64 2 19 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA110A NWA1302-

NWA5123-

NWA5123-

WAC5302 ACV2 AC PRO AC HD AC HD D-S Supported PoE Standards IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at

(per radio +

physical switch) Console Port 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial FEATURES Monitor Mode

& Rogue APs ContainmentA Rogue AP Detection WDS (Wireless Distribution System) - Root AP & Repeater Modes Tunnel Forwarding Mode Layer-2 Isolation Power Detection External Antennas Internal Antennas Antenna Switch LED Locator LED Suppression AC (AP Controller) Discovery NebulaFlex PRO NCC Discovery 802.11r Fast Roaming Support 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) USB Port for BLE Ethernet Storm Control No Yes No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes X No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes AC No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No AC Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 20 Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 Zyxel Device 1000/5000 Series Comparison Table NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA1123-

NWA110A NWA1302-

NWA5123-

NWA5123-

WAC5302 FEATURES ACV2 AC PRO AC HD Grounding No No Yes X Yes AC No AC No AC HD Yes D-S No 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs 256 event logs and 1 debug logs A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC Users Guide for details. Table 2 WAC 6000 Series Comparison Table Maximum number of log messages FEATURES Supported Wireless Standards Supported Frequency Bands Available Security Modes Number of SSID Profiles Number of Wireless Radios Monitor Mode & Rogue APs ContainmentA Rogue AP Detection WDS (Wireless Distribution System) -

Root AP & Repeater Modes Tunnel Forwarding Mode Layer-2 Isolation Supported PoE Standards Power Detection External Antennas Internal Antennas Antenna Switch Console Port LED Locator LED Suppression AC (AP Controller) Discovery WAC6103D WAC6303D WAC6502D WAC6502D WAC6503D WAC6552D WAC6553D

-I

-S

-E

-S

-S

-S

-E IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-

IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(per radio +

physical switch) MIX 64 2 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 21 MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes MIX 64 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial RJ-45 serial Chapter 1 Introduction Table 2 WAC 6000 Series Comparison Table WAC6103D WAC6303D WAC6502D WAC6502D WAC6503D WAC6552D WAC6553D FEATURES NebulaFlex PRO NCC Discovery 802.11r Fast Roaming Support 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming Bluetooth Low Energy

(BLE) USB Port for BLE Ethernet Storm Control Grounding Maximum number of log messages

-I Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No

-S Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

-E Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC Users Guide for details. Table 3 WAX 500/600 Series Comparison Table FEATURES WAX510D WAX650S

-S Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No

-S Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes

-E Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes

-S Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes 64 2 No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Supported Wireless Standards Supported Frequency Bands Available Security Modes IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11ax 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11ax 2.4 GHz 5 GHz None WEP WPA2 WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-MIX Enhanced-open WPA3-enterprise WPA3-personal WPA2-MIX WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK-MIX Enhanced-open WPA3-enterprise WPA3-personal Number of SSID Profiles Number of Wireless Radios Monitor Mode & Rogue APs ContainmentA Rogue AP Detection WDS (Wireless Distribution System) - Root AP &

Repeater Modes Tunnel Forwarding Mode Layer-2 Isolation Supported PoE Standards Power Detection External Antennas Internal Antennas 64 2 No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes IEEE 802.3af IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3at IEEE 802.3bt NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 22 Table 3 WAX 500/600 Series Comparison Table Chapter 1 Introduction WAX510D WAX650S Yes

(per AP) 4-Pin Serial 4-Pin Serial FEATURES Antenna Switch Console Port LED Locator LED Suppression AC (AP Controller) Discovery NebulaFlex PRO NCC Discovery 802.11r Fast Roaming Support 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) USB Port for BLE Ethernet Storm Control Grounding Maximum number of log messages Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes A. For NXC managed devices only. See the NXC Users Guide for details. 512 event logs and 1024 debug logs NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 23 C H A P T E R 2 AP Management 2.1 Management Mode The Zyxel Device is a unified AP and can be managed by the NCC or an AP controller (AC), or work as a standalone device. We recommend you use NCC to manage multiple APs (see the NCC Users Guide). An AP Controller such as the NXC can only manage multiple APs in the same location. Note: Not all models can be managed by NCC or an AC. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to check whether your product supports these. The following table shows the default IP addresses and firmware upload methods for different management modes. Table 4 Zyxel Device Management Mode Comparison MANAGEMENT MODE DEFAULT IP ADDRESS UPLOAD FIRMWARE VIA Nebula Control Center AP Controller Standalone Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic or Static (192.168.1.2) NCC Portal AP Controller using CAPWAP Built-in Web Configurator When the Zyxel Device is in standalone mode and connects to a DHCP server, it uses the IP address assigned by the DHCP server. Otherwise, the Zyxel Device uses the default static management IP address (192.168.1.2). You can use the NCC Discovery or AC Discovery screen to allow the Zyxel Device to be managed by the NCC or an AC, respectively. When the Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC or an AC, it acts as a DHCP client and obtains an IP address from the NCC/AC. It can be configured ONLY by the NCC/AC. To change the Zyxel Device back to standalone mode, use the Reset button to restore the default configuration. Alternatively, you need to check the NCC/AC for the Zyxel Devices IP address and use FTP to upload the default configuration file at conf/system-default.conf to the Zyxel Device and reboot the device. 2.1.1 Standalone When working in standalone mode, the Zyxel Device is configured mainly with its built-in web configurator. You can only connect to and set up one Zyxel Device at a time in this mode. See Chapter 5 on page 65 for detailed information about the standalone web configurator screens. 2.1.2 Nebula Control Center In this mode, which is also called cloud mode, you can manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through the Zyxel Nebula cloud-based network management system. This means you can manage devices remotely without the need of connecting to each device directly. It offers many features to better manage and monitor not just the Zyxel Device, but your network as a whole, including supported NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 24 Chapter 2 AP Management switches and gateways. Your network can also be managed through your smartphone using the Nebula Mobile app. See Section 25.1 on page 227 for an example NCC managed network topology. NCC allows different levels of management. You can configure each device on its own or configure a set of devices together as a site. You can also monitor groups of sites called organizations, as shown below. Table 5 NCC management levels Organization Site A Site B Device A-1 Device A-2 Device B-1 Device B-2 It graphically presents your device/network statistics and shows an overview of your network topology, as shown in the following figure. It also sends reports, alerts, and notifications for events, such as when a site goes offline. Figure 5 Traffic monitoring graph from NCC NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 AP Management See the NCC (Nebula Control Center) Users Guide for how to configure Nebula managed devices. See Chapter 27 on page 231 if you want to change the Zyxel Devices VLAN setting or manually set its IP address. Note: Make sure your network firewall allows TCP ports 443, 4335, and 6667 as well as UDP port 123 so the device can connect to and sync with the NCC. 2.1.3 AP Controller (AC) If the Zyxel Device supports management using an AC (see Section 9.1.1 on page 94) such as the NXC2500 or NXC5500, and you have this AC in the same subnet, it will be managed by the controller automatically. To set the Zyxel Device to be managed by an AC in a different subnet or change between management modes, use the AC Discovery screen (see Section 9.5 on page 102 and Section 9.1.1 on page 94). You can use the AC to manage multiple Zyxel Devices. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for an example AC managed network topology. Note: If the Zyxel Device is already registered to NCC, the controller will be unable to manage it. An AC uses Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP, see RFC 5415) to discover and configure multiple managed APs. 2.2 Switching Management Modes The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode by default, with NCC and/or AC discovery enabled. Standalone-to-NCC Register the Zyxel Device at the NCC website and then turn on the Zyxel Device. Make sure that NCC Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.6 on page 103). The NCC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered. Standalone-to-AC (NXC) By default, the Zyxel Device must be in the same subnet as the NXC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for setting it up in a different subnet. Make sure AC Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.5 on page 102). The NXC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered. Register the Zyxel Device at the NCC website. Make sure that NCC Discovery is enabled on your Zyxel Device (see Section 9.6 on page 103). In the NXC web configurator, select the Zyxel Device and press the Nebula button. The NCC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered. NXC-to-NCC NCC-to-NXC Unregister the Zyxel Device at the NCC portal. By default, the Zyxel Device must be in the same subnet as the NXC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for setting it up in a different subnet. Make sure AC Discovery NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 26 Chapter 2 AP Management is enabled (see Section 9.5 on page 102). The NXC manages the Zyxel Device automatically when it is discovered. Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC organization/site. Reset the Zyxel Device to factory defaults

(see Section 29.6 on page 247). NCC-to-Standalone AC-to-Standalone Use the Reset button to return the Zyxel Device to its factory default settings (see Section 29.6 on page 247). 2.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to be near it. The ZON Utility issues requests via Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the device responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your computer (Windows operating system). 2.3.1 Requirements Before installing the ZON Utility on your PC, please make sure it meets the requirements listed below. Operating System At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:

Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >

Properties. You should see this information in the General tab. Note: It is suggested that you install Npcap, the packet capture library for Windows operating systems, and remove WinPcap or any other installed packet capture tools before you install the ZON utility. Hardware Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 AP Management Core i3 processor 2GB RAM 100MB free hard disk WXGA (Wide XGA 1280x800) 2.3.2 Run the ZON Utility 1 Double-click the ZON Utility to run it. 2 The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen. Figure 6 Supported Devices and Versions If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 28 Chapter 2 AP Management Figure 7 ZON Utility Screen 3 Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected. Figure 8 Network Adapter 4 Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network. Figure 9 Discovery 5 The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 AP Management Figure 10 ZON Utility Screen 6 Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for your devices. Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the device using the ZON utility icons. Figure 11 Password Prompt The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen. Table 6 ZON Utility Icons ICON DESCRIPTION 1 IP configuration Change the selected devices IP address. 2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address. 3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting or upgrading new firmware. 4 Reset Configuration to Default Use this icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations. 5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink. 6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will need a username and password to log in. 7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model. Make sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website to your computer and unzipped it in advance. 8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know the current admin password before changing to a new one. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 30 Chapter 2 AP Management Table 6 ZON Utility Icons ICON DESCRIPTION 9 Configure NCC Discovery You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If its enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, itll go into the Nebula cloud management mode. 10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP. 11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again. 12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected device. 13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adaptor for the computer on which the ZON utility is installed, and the utility language. The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen. Table 7 ZON Utility Fields DESCRIPTION This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered. This field displays the model name of the discovered device. Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device. MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device. This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that first received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility. System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device. This field displays where the discovered device is. This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done successfully. As the Zyxel Device does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address and Flash Locator LED, this field displays Update failed, Not support Renew IP address and Not support Flash Locator LED respectively. This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature. If its enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, itll go into the Nebula cloud management mode. LABEL Type Model IP Address Location Status NCC Discovery Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number. Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device. 2.4 Ways to Access the Zyxel Device You can use the following ways to configure the Zyxel Device. Web Configurator The Web Configurator allows easy Zyxel Device setup and management using an Internet browser. If your Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC or an AC, use this only for troubleshooting if you cannot connect to the Internet. This Users Guide provides information about the Web Configurator. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 31 Chapter 2 AP Management NCC ZON Utility This is the primary means by which you manage the Zyxel Device in cloud (NCC) mode. With the NCC, you can remotely manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through a cloud-based network management system. See the NCC Users Guide for more information. Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility is a utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a simple and efficient way. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your computer (Windows operating system). For more information on ZON Utility see Section 2.3 on page 27. Command-Line Interface (CLI) The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the Zyxel Device. You can access it using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet) or via the console port. See the Command Reference Guide for more information. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Zyxel Device can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this Users Guide. 2.5 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device Do the following things regularly to make the Zyxel Device more secure and to manage it more effectively. Change the password often. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the Zyxel Device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you wont have to totally re-configure the Zyxel Device; you can simply restore your last configuration. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 32 C H A P T E R 3 Hardware See the Quick Start Guide for hardware installation and connections. 3.1 Grounding (WAC6552D-S and WAC6553D-E) Earth grounding helps protect against lightning and interference. Note: The power installation must be performed by qualified service personnel and should conform to the National Electrical Code. The Zyxel Device must be connected to earth ground to adequately ground the Zyxel Device and protect the operator from electrical hazards. Qualified service personnel must confirm that the protective earthing terminal of the building is a valid terminal. Before connecting the ground, ensure that a qualified service personnel has attached an appropriate ground lug to the ground cable. Remove one of the ground screws from the Zyxel Devices rear panel. 1 2 Secure a green/yellow ground cable (18 AWG or smaller) to the Zyxel Devices rear panel using the ground screw. 3 Attach the other end of the cable to the ground, either to the same ground electrode as the pole you installed the Zyxel Device on or to the main grounding electrode of the building. Note: Follow your country's regulations and safety instructions to electrically ground the Zyxel Device properly. If you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available, contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician. Warning! Connect the ground cable before you connect any other cables or wiring. The figure below illustrates how the ground cable (A) is attached to the Zyxel Device and goes to the earth ground (B). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 12 Grounding Example 3.2 Zyxel Device Models With Single LEDs The LEDs of some Zyxel Device models can be controlled by using the suppression feature such that the LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device is ready. Some Zyxel Device models also has Locator LED which allows you to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device among several devices in the network. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to check which models support these features. Refer to Chapter 21 on page 219 for the LED Suppression and Locator menus in standalone mode. The following models have single LEDs: NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123AC, NWA5123-AC HD, WAC6303D-S, NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S. 3.2.1 NWA1123-ACv2 The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 34 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 13 NWA1123-ACv2 LED The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-ACv2. Table 8 NWA1123-ACv2 LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Green On Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting to the NCC. The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC. The Zyxel Device is ready for use and its wireless interface is activated. The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed, the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) The Locator LED is on. Amber On The Zyxel Device is powered up. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 35 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 8 NWA1123-ACv2 LED (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Red Steady On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) The Uplink interface is down. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. 3.2.2 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6303D-S or NWA5123-AC HD. Figure 14 WAC6303D-S LED The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6303D-S or NWA5123-AC HD. Table 9 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting with NCC. The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC or an AC. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 36 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 9 WAC6303D-S and NWA5123-AC HD LED (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Green Blinks amber and green alternatively 2 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Slow Blinking (On for 1 second, Off for 1 second) The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC but the uplink is disconnected. The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet registered with the NCC. The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). Green Steady On Amber Steady On Bright Blue Steady On White Steady On Slow Blinking (On for 100ms per second) Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10 minutes. Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1 time, Off for 1 second) Red On Fast Blinking (On for 50 milliseconds, Off for 50 milliseconds) The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a channel for radar signals. The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3 seconds) The Uplink port of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is disconnected. 3.2.3 NWA1123-AC HD The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 37 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 15 NWA1123-AC HD LED The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC HD. Table 10 NWA1123-AC HD LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Slow Blinking (On for 1 second, Off for 1 second) Green Steady On Amber Steady On Bright Blue Steady On The Zyxel Device is booting up or connecting with NCC. The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC. The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet registered with the NCC. The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 38 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 10 NWA1123-AC HD LED (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION White Steady On The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). Slow Blinking (On for 100ms per second) Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10 minutes. Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1 time, Off for 1 second) Red On The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a channel for radar signals. The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50 milliseconds, Off for 50 milliseconds) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3 seconds) The Uplink interface of the Zyxel Device is down. 3.2.4 NWA5123-AC The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA5123-AC. Figure 16 NWA5123-AC LED NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 39 Chapter 3 Hardware The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA5123-AC. Table 11 NWA5123-AC LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Blinks amber and green alternatively 2 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The Zyxel Device is booting up. The Zyxel Device is discovering an AC. The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink interface is down. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use and its wireless interface is activated. Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed, or the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) The Locator LED is on. Amber On The Zyxel Device is powered up. Red Steady On The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) The Uplink interface is down. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. 3.2.5 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 40 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 17 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S. Table 12 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Amber Green Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Blinks amber and green alternatively 2 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. Slow Blinking (On for 1 second, Off for 1 second) Green Steady On The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting with NCC. The Zyxel Device is discovering the NCC or an AC. The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC but the uplink is disconnected. The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or fails, the Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is configured to be managed by NCC but is not yet registered with the NCC. Note: WiFi networks on the WAX650S are turned off automatically when it is connected to a device that supplies power using IEEE 802.3af PoE. The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in full power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 41 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 12 NWA110AX, WAX510D and WAX650S LED (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Steady On Bright Blue Steady On White Steady On The Zyxel Device is ready for use, the Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, and/or wireless clients are connected to the Zyxel Device in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in full power mode

(see Table 26 on page 67). The Zyxel Devices wireless interface is activated, but there are no wireless clients connected when it is in limited power mode (see Table 26 on page 67). Slow Blinking (On for 100ms per second) Locator LED is on. It switches off automatically after the configured amount of time (1-60min). Default duration is 10 minutes. Blue Slow Blinking (Blink for 1 time, Off for 1 second) Red On Fast Blinking (On for 50 milliseconds, Off for 50 milliseconds) The Zyxel Device is performing a Channel Availability Check

(CAC) with Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to monitor a channel for radar signals. The Zyxel Device failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3 seconds) The Uplink port of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is disconnected. 3.3 Zyxel Device Models With Multiple LEDs The LEDs of some Zyxel Device models can be controlled by using the suppression feature such that the LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device is ready. Some Zyxel Device models also has Locator LED which allows you to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device among several devices in the network. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to check which models support these features. Refer to Chapter 21 on page 219 for the LED Suppression and Locator menus in standalone mode. The following models have multiple LEDs: NWA1123-AC PRO, NWA1302-AC, WAC6103D-I, WAC5302D-S, WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, WAC6503D-S. 3.3.1 NWA1123-AC PRO The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA1123-AC PRO. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 42 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 18 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 13 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the Zyxel Device is booting up. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use. Slow Blinking (On for 1 sec, Off for 1 sec) Red On The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed. There is a system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure. The Zyxel Device is undergoing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50 ms, Off for 50 ms) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3 sec) The Uplink interface is down. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 43 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 13 NWA1123-AC PRO LEDs (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC. Amber Green Amber Green Green Amber Green Amber WLAN WLAN Slow Blinking (On for 1 sec, Off for 1 sec) The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. The Zyxel Device is searching for (discovering) the NCC. The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device. Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode. The 2.4 GHz radio is set to Ceiling and is active The 2.4 GHz radio is set to Wall and is active The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz radio is set to Ceiling and is active The 5 GHz radio is set to Wall and is active The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. UPLINK Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 100 Mbps. The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The port is not connected. LAN Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data at 100 Mbps. Green On The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). Locator White Blinking The LAN port is sending/receiving data at 1 Gbps. The LAN port is not connected. The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. Off The Locator function is off. Off On On Off On On Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Blinking Off 3.3.2 NWA1302-AC By default, the LEDs automatically turn on when the NWA1302-AC is ready. If the LEDs are turned off by the NCC, you can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 44 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 19 NWA1302-AC LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 14 NWA1302-AC LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the Zyxel Device is booting up. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use. Slow Blinking (On for 1 sec, Off for 1 sec) The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed. Fast Blinking (On 50ms, Off 50ms) The Locator LED is on. Red On There is a system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure. The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50 ms, Off for 50 ms) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3 sec) The Uplink interface is down. Slow Blinking (On for 1 sec, Off for 1 sec) The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. The Zyxel Device is searching for (discovering) the NCC. Amber Green Amber Green Off Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode. Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by the NCC. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 45 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 14 NWA1302-AC LEDs (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LED UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection. Green On WLAN Green WLAN Green Green On Blinking Blinking Off On Off On Off On Blinking Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 10/100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 1Gbps. The port is not connected. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 10/100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. LAN Amber The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection. Off The LAN port is not connected. 3.3.3 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 46 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 20 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 15 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LED PWR/SYS Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. The Zyxel Device is booting up or is connecting to the NCC or to an AC. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use. Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1ss) The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed. Red On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure. The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) The Uplink interface is down. Slow Blinking (Blink for 2 times, Off for 3s) The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink is disconnected. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 47 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 15 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, or WAC6503D-S LEDs (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by a the NCC or an AC. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for an AC. The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode. The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for the NCC. The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device. Amber Green Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. WLAN Green WLAN Green The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. UPLINK Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. Green On Green On On Off On Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking Off Off The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The port is not connected. The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The LAN port is not connected. The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. The Locator function is off. LAN Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. Locator White Blinking 3.3.4 WAC6103D-I The following are the LED descriptions for your WAC6103D-I. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 48 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 21 WAC6103D-I LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 16 WAC6103D-I LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. The Zyxel Device is booting up. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use. Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed. Red On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure. The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) The Uplink port is disconnected. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 49 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 16 WAC6103D-I LEDs (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC or the NCC. The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for an AC. The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode. The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for the NCC. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The NCC is connecting to the registered Zyxel Device. Amber Green Amber Green Green Amber Green Amber WLAN WLAN On On Off On On Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking Off Off Green On Green On Locator White Blinking 3.3.5 WAC5302D-S UPLINK Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. LAN Amber The port is operating as a 100 Mbps connection. The 2.4 GHz radio is set to Ceiling and is active The 2.4 GHz radio is set to Wall and is active The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz radio is set to Ceiling and is active The 5 GHz radio is set to Wall and is active The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The port is not connected. The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The LAN port is not connected. The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. The Locator function is off. The LEDs automatically turn off when the WAC5302D-S is ready. You can press the LED ON button for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 50 Chapter 3 Hardware Figure 22 WAC5302D-S LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 17 WAC5302D-S LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Blinks amber for 1 second and green for 1 second alternatively. The LED blinks amber and green alternatively when the WAC is booting up. Green On The Zyxel Device is ready for use. Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The wireless module of the Zyxel Device is disabled or failed. Fast Blinking (On 50ms, Off 50ms) The Locator LED is on. Red On There is system error and the Zyxel Device cannot boot up, or the Zyxel Device suffered a system failure. The Zyxel Device is doing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) The Uplink interface is down. Slow Blinking (Blink for 2 times, Off for 3s) The Zyxel Device is managed by an AC and the uplink is disconnected. Management Green On The Zyxel Device is managed by a controller. Slow Blinking (Blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The Zyxel Device is searching (discovery) for a controller. The Zyxel Device is using default wireless settings, or the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC but is unregistered with the NCC. Off The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 51 Chapter 3 Hardware Table 17 WAC5302D-S LEDs (continued) COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LED UPLINK Amber On The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection. Green On WLAN Green WLAN Green Green On Blinking Blinking Off On Off On Off On Blinking Blinking Off The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 10/100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The Zyxel Device is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The port is not connected. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 10/100 Mbps. The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port at 1 Gbps. The LAN port is not connected. LAN Amber The port is operating as a 10/100 Mbps connection. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 52 C H A P T E R 4 The Web Configurator 4.1 Overview The Zyxel Device Web Configurator allows management using an Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 36.0 and later versions, Safari 9.0 and later In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:

versions, or Google Chrome 38.0 and later versions. Allow pop-up windows. Enable JavaScript (enabled by default). Enable Java permissions (enabled by default). Enable cookies. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher. 4.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Zyxel Device hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 3 If the Zyxel Device and your computer are not connected to a DHCP server, make sure your computers IP address is in the range between "192.168.1.3" and "192.168.1.254". Browse to the Zyxel Devices DHCP-assigned IP address or http://192.168.1.2. The Login screen appears. If you are in NCC mode, check the NCCs AP > Monitor > Access Point screen for the Zyxel Devices LAN IP address. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator If a Zyxel Device is in standalone mode and supports NCC, the login page displays as shown in the following figure. Click Nebula Mode to show the following screen. Here, you can watch a tutorial for using the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) or access the link to the NCC, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise, continue with the next step. The NCC is a cloud-based network management system that allows you to remotely manage and monitor the Zyxel Device (see Section 2.1.2 on page 24). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 54 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator If you want to return to the login page, click Standalone Mode and follow the next steps. Enter the user name (default: admin) and password (default: 1234). If the Zyxel Device is being managed or has been managed by the NCC, check the NCC's Site-Wide > Configure > General setting screen for the Zyxel Device's current password. Select the language you prefer for the Web Configurator. Click Login. The wizard screen opens when the Zyxel Device is accessed for the first time or when you reset the Zyxel Device to its default factory settings. If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears. Otherwise, the dashboard appears. 4 5 6 7 The Update Admin Info screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and default password. If you change the password for the default user account, this screen does not appear anymore. 4.3 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. The following figures show the Dashboard screen for standalone mode and for cloud (NCC) mode. The screen is different for standalone mode and cloud (NCC) mode and may vary slightly for different models. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 23 The Web Configurators Main Screen for Standalone Mode Figure 24 The Web Configurators Main Screen for Cloud Mode The Web Configurators main screen is divided into these parts:

A - Title Bar B - Navigation Panel C - Main Window 4.3.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how deep into the Web Configurator you navigate. If your Zyxel Device is in NCC mode, not all icons will be available in the Title Bar (see Figure 24 on page 56). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 56 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 25 Title Bar The icons provide the following functions. Table 18 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons DESCRIPTION Click this to open the wizard. See Chapter 7 on page 73 for more information. Click this to open the help page for the current screen. Click this to go to Zyxel Biz User Forum, where you can get the latest Zyxel Device information and have conversations with other people by posting your messages. Site Map Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. Click this to log out of the Web Configurator. Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window. LABEL Wizard Help Forum CLI Logout nebula Site Map Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screens link to go to that screen. Figure 26 Site Map CLI Messages Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. These commands appear in a popup window, such as the following. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 27 CLI Messages Click Clear to remove the currently displayed information. Note: See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands. 4.3.2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Zyxel Device features. Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel menus or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the Zyxel Devices navigation panel menus and their screens. Figure 28 Navigation Panel 4.3.3 Standalone Mode Navigation Panel Menus The following are the screens available in standalone mode. Note that some screens may not be available for your Zyxel Device model. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to see which features your Zyxel Device model supports. Dashboard The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. For details on the Dashboards features, see Chapter 6 on page 67. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 58 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Monitor Menu The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information. Table 19 Monitor Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION Network Status Display general LAN interface information and packet statistics. Network Status Wireless AP Information Radio List Display information about the radios of the connected APs. Station Info Station List Display information about the connected stations. WDS Link Info WDS Link Info Display statistics about the Zyxel Devices WDS (Wireless Distribution System) connections. Detected Device Display information about suspected rogue APs. Detected Device Log View Log Display log entries for the Zyxel Device. Configuration Menu Use the configuration menu screens to configure the Zyxel Devices features. Table 20 Configuration Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION Network Configure the IP address for the Zyxel Device Ethernet interface. IP Setting VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings. Storm Control Enable or disable the broadcast/multicast storm control feature. AC Discovery Configure the Zyxel Devices AP Controller settings. NCC Discovery Configure proxy server settings to access the NCC. Wireless AP Management Rogue AP WLAN Setting Manage the Zyxel Devices general wireless settings. Rogue/Friendly AP List Configure how the Zyxel Device monitors for rogue APs. Load Balancing Load Balancing Configure load balancing for traffic moving to and from wireless clients. DCS DCS Configure dynamic wireless channel selection. Bluetooth Advertising Settings Configure the beacon ID(s) to be included in the Bluetooth Object User advertising packet. Create and manage users. User Setting SSID AP Profile Radio Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be associated with different APs. Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions, and rules to force user authentication. Create and manage wireless SSID, security, MAC filtering, and layer-2 isolation files that can be associated with different APs. MON Profile MON Profile Create and manage rogue AP monitoring files that can be associated with different APs. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 20 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued) FOLDER OR LINK WDS Profile TAB WDS FUNCTION Create and manage WDS profiles that can be used to connect to different APs in WDS. Certificate My Certificates Create and manage th e Zyxel Devices certificates. Trusted Certificates Import and manage certificates from trusted sources. Host Name Host Name Configure the system and domain name for the Zyxel Device. Power Mode Power Mode Configure the Zyxel Devices power settings. Date/Time Date/Time Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the Zyxel Device. Service Control Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication. SSH TELNET FTP SNMP Configure SSH server and SSH service settings. Configure telnet server settings for the Zyxel Device. Configure FTP server settings. Configure SNMP communities and services. System WWW SSH TELNET FTP SNMP Log & Report Email Daily Report Email Daily Report Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to send. Log Setting Log Setting Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers. Maintenance Menu Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and reboot or shut down the Zyxel Device. Table 21 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION File Manager Configuration File Manage and upload configuration files for the Zyxel Device. Firmware Package View the current firmware version and to upload firmware. Shell Script Diagnostics Suppression Locator Manage and run shell script files for the Zyxel Device. Collect diagnostic information. Enable this feature to keep the LEDs off after the Zyxel Device starts. Enable this feature to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. Antenna Switch Change antenna orientation for the radios. Reboot Shutdown Restart the Zyxel Device. Turn off the Zyxel Device. Diagnostics LEDs Antenna Reboot Shutdown 4.3.4 Cloud Mode Navigation Panel Menus If your Zyxel Device is in NCC mode, you only need to use the Web Configurator for troubleshooting if your Zyxel Device cannot connect to the Internet. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 60 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Dashboard The dashboard displays general Zyxel Device information, and AP information in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. For details on the Dashboards features, see Chapter 26 on page 229. Configuration Menu Use the configuration menu screens to configure the Zyxel Devices features. Table 22 Configuration Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION Network Configure the IP address for the Zyxel Device Ethernet interface. IP Setting VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings. 4.3.5 Tables and Lists The Web Configurator tables and lists are quite flexible and provide several options for how to display their entries. 4.3.5.1 Manipulating Table Display Here are some of the ways you can manipulate the Web Configurator tables. 1 Click a column heading to sort the tables entries according to that columns criteria. 2 Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what you can do:

Sort in ascending alphabetical order Sort in descending (reverse) alphabetical order Select which columns to display Group entries by field Show entries in groups Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 Select a column heading cells right border and drag to re-size the column. 4 Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark displays next to the columns title when you drag the column to a valid new location. 5 Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control how many entries display at a time. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 62 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4.3.5.2 Working with Table Entries The tables have icons for working with table entries. A sample is shown next. You can often use the [Shift]

or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate. Table 23 Common Table Icons Here are descriptions for the most common table icons. Table 24 Common Table Icons DESCRIPTION LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entrys position in the numbered list is important (features where the Zyxel Device applies the tables entries in order like the firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 63 PART I Standalone Configuration 64 C H A P T E R 5 Standalone Configuration 5.1 Overview The Zyxel Device is in standalone mode by default. Use the web configurator to manage and configure the Zyxel Device directly. As shown in the following figure, wireless clients can connect to the Zyxel Device (A) to access network resources. 5.2 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device Here are some of the ways to start and stop the Zyxel Device. Always use Maintenance > Shutdown or the shutdown command before you turn off the Zyxel Device or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt. Table 25 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device METHOD DESCRIPTION Turning on the power A cold start occurs when you turn on the power to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device powers up, checks the hardware, and starts the system processes. Rebooting the Zyxel Device A warm start (without powering down and powering up again) occurs when you use the Reboot button in the Reboot screen or when you use the reboot command. The Zyxel Device writes all cached data to the local storage, stops the system processes, and then does a warm start. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Standalone Configuration Table 25 Starting and Stopping the Zyxel Device METHOD DESCRIPTION Using the RESET button If you press the RESET button on the back of the Zyxel Device, the Zyxel Device sets the configuration to its default values and then reboots. See Section 29.6 on page 247 for more information. Clicking Maintenance

> Shutdown >

Shutdown or using the shutdown command Clicking Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or using the shutdown command writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Wait for the Zyxel Device to shut down and then manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power. Disconnecting the power Power off occurs when you turn off the power to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device simply turns off. It does not stop the system processes or write cached data to local storage. The Zyxel Device does not stop or start the system processes when you apply configuration files or run shell scripts although you may temporarily lose access to network resources. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 66 C H A P T E R 6 Dashboard 6.1 Overview This screen displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets. Figure 29 Dashboard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Dashboard LABEL DESCRIPTION Widget Settings (A) Use this link to re-open closed widgets. Widgets that are already open appear grayed out. Refresh Time Setting

(B) Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget. Refresh Now (C) Click this to update the widgets information immediately. Close Widget (D) Click this to close the widget. Use Widget Settings to re-open it. Device Information System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Zyxel Device on any network. Click the icon to open the screen where you can change it. System Location This field displays the location of the Zyxel Device. Click the icon to open the screen where you can change it. Model Name This field displays the model name of this Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 67 Chapter 6 Dashboard Table 26 Dashboard (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Zyxel Device. MAC Address Range This field displays the MAC addresses used by the Zyxel Device. Each physical port or wireless radio has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet LAN port, the second MAC address is assigned to the first radio, and so on. Firmware Version This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the Zyxel Device is currently running. Click the icon to open the screen where you can upload firmware. This field displays whether the latest firmware update was successfully completed. This field displays the date and time when the last firmware update was made. Last Firmware Upgrade Status Last Firmware Upgrade System Resources CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Devices processing capability is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show CPU Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the Zyxel Devices recent CPU usage. Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Devices RAM is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show Memory Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the Zyxel Devices recent memory usage. Flash Usage This field displays what percentage of the Zyxel Devices onboard flash memory is currently being used. Ethernet Neighbor Local Port

(Description) This field displays the port of the Zyxel Device, on which the neighboring device is discovered. Model Name This field displays the model name of the discovered device. System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device. FW Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device. Port (Description) This field displays the discovered devices port which is connected to the Zyxel Device. This field displays the IP address of the discovered device. Click the IP address to access and manage the discovered device using its web configurator. This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device. WDS (Wireless Distribution System) Uplink/Downlink Status MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. This field displays the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. This field displays the channel number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. This field displays the name of the wireless network to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. IP MAC Radio Channel SSID Security Mode This field displays which secure encryption methods is being used by the Zyxel Device to connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS. Link Status This field displays the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) and transmission/reception rate of the wireless connection in WDS. System Status System Uptime This field displays how long the Zyxel Device has been running since it last restarted or was turned on. Current Date/

Time This field displays the current date and time in the Zyxel Device. The format is yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 68 Chapter 6 Dashboard Table 26 Dashboard (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Login User This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining. Boot Status This field displays details about the Zyxel Devices startup state. OK - The Zyxel Device started up successfully. Firmware update OK - A firmware update was successful. Problematic configuration after firmware update - The application of the configuration failed after a firmware upgrade. System default configuration - The Zyxel Device successfully applied the system default configuration. This occurs when the Zyxel Device starts for the first time or you intentionally reset the Zyxel Device to the system default settings. Fallback to lastgood configuration - The Zyxel Device was unable to apply the startup-

config.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file. Fallback to system default configuration - The Zyxel Device was unable to apply the lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file

(system-default.conf). Booting in progress - The Zyxel Device is still applying the system configuration. This shows whether the Zyxel Device is set to work as a stand alone AP. Management Mode Power Mode This displays the Zyxel Devices power status. Full - the Zyxel Device receives power using a power adapter and/or through a PoE switch/

injector using IEEE 802.3at PoE plus or IEEE 802.3bt (WAX650S only at the time of writing). Limited - the Zyxel Device receives power through a PoE switch/injector using IEEE 802.3af PoE or IEEE 802.3at PoE plus (WAX650S only at the time of writing) even when it is also connected to a power source using a power adapter. When the Zyxel Device is in limited power mode, the Zyxel Device throughput decreases and has just one transmitting radio chain. It always shows Full if the Zyxel Device does not support power detection. See Section 1.4 on page 19. Bluetooth This field displays the Zyxel Devices Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) capability. Bluetooth Low Energy, which is also known as Bluetooth Smart, transmits less data over a shorter distance and consumes less power than classic Bluetooth. The Zyxel Device communicates with other BLE enabled devices using advertisements. N/A displays if the Zyxel Device does not support BLE. Unavailable displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth, but there is no BLE USB dongle connected to the USB port of the Zyxel Device. Some Zyxel Devices, such as the WAC5302D-

S, need to have a supported BLE USB dongle attached to act as a beacon to broadcast packets. Available displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth and detects a BLE device but advertising is inactive. Advertising displays if the Zyxel Device supports Bluetooth, detects a BLE device, and advertising is activated, which means the Zyxel Device can broadcast packets to every BLE device around it. Interface Status Summary If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is displayed in light gray text. Click the Detail icon to go to a (more detailed) summary screen of interface statistics. Name This field displays the name of each interface. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 69 Chapter 6 Dashboard Table 26 Dashboard (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Status This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is. Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled. Down - The Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected. Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the interface belongs. IP Addr/Netmask This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask via DHCP. IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IP address. Static - This interface has a static IP address. DHCP Client - This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server. Action If the interface has a static IP address, this shows n/a. If the interface has a dynamic IP address, use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. WLAN Interface Status Summary This displays status information for the WLAN interface. Status This displays whether or not the WLAN interface is activated. MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio. Radio Band OP Mode Channel Antenna This indicates the radio number on the Zyxel Device. This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio. This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode. This indicates the radios operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), MON

(monitor), Root AP or Repeater. This indicates the channel number the radio is using. This indicates the antenna orientation for the radio (Wall or Ceiling). This field is not available if the Zyxel Device does not allow you to adjust antenna orientation for the Zyxel Devices radio(s) using the web configurator or a physical switch. Refer to Section 1.4 on page 19 to see if your Zyxel Device has an antenna switch. Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to the Zyxel Device. AP Information This shows a summary of connected wireless Access Points (APs). All Sensed Device This sections displays a summary of all wireless devices detected by the network. Click the link to go to the Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device screen. Un-Classified AP This displays the number of detected unclassified APs. Rogue AP This displays the number of detected rogue APs. Friendly AP This displays the number of detected friendly APs. 6.1.1 CPU Usage Use this screen to look at a chart of the Zyxel Devices recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click CPU Usage in the dashboard. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 70 Chapter 6 Dashboard Figure 30 Dashboard > CPU Usage The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Dashboard > CPU Usage DESCRIPTION LABEL

time The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage. The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away. 6.1.2 Memory Usage Use this screen to look at a chart of the Zyxel Devices recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this screen, click Memory Usage in the dashboard. Figure 31 Dashboard > Memory Usage NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 Dashboard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Dashboard > Memory Usage DESCRIPTION LABEL

time The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage. The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 72 C H A P T E R 7 Setup Wizard 7.1 Accessing the Wizard When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the Zyxel Device to its default configuration, the wizard screen displays. Note: If you have already configured the wizard screens and want to open it again, click the Wizard icon on the upper right corner of any Web Configurator screen. 7.2 Using the Wizard 7.2.1 Step 1 Time Settings This wizard helps you configure the Zyxel Device IP address, change time zone, daylight saving and radio settings, and edit an SSID profile to change general wireless and wireless security settings. Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Devices country code, time zone and daylight saving time. Country Code: Select the country where the Zyxel Device is located. Note: The country code field is not available and you cannot change the country code if the Zyxel Device products comply with the U.S. laws, policies and regulations and are to be sold to the U.S. market. Time Zone: Select the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Enable Daylight Saving: Select the option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts and ends. Offset allows you to specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends. Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments). Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 73 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard Figure 32 Wizard: Time Settings 7.2.2 Step 2 Password and Uplink Connection Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Devices system password and IP address. Change Password: Enter a new password and retype it to confirm. Uplink Connection: Select Auto (DHCP) if the Zyxel Device is connected to a router with the DHCP server enabled. You then need to check the router for the IP address assigned to the Zyxel Device in order to access the Zyxel Devices web configurator again. Otherwise, select Static IP when the Zyxel Device is NOT connected to a router or you want to assign it a fixed IP address. You will need to manually enter:

the Zyxel Devices IP address and subnet mask. the IP address of the router that helps forward traffic. a DNS server's IP address. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 74 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard Figure 33 Wizard: Change Password and Uplink Connection 7.2.3 Step 3 Radio Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Devices radio transmitter(s). Channel Selection: Select Auto to have the Zyxel Device automatically choose a radio channel that has least interference. Otherwise, select Manual and specify a channel the Zyxel Device will use in the 2.4GHz or 5GHz wireless LAN. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Maximum Output Power: Enter the maximum output power of the Zyxel Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to reduce interference with other APs. Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Devices effective broadcast radius. Click Prev to return to the previous screen. Click Next to proceed. Click Cancel to close the wizard without saving. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 75 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard Figure 34 Wizard: Radio 7.2.4 Step 4 SSID Use this screen to enable, disable or edit an SSID profile. Select an SSID profile and click the Status switch to turn it on or off. To change an SSID profiles settings, such as the SSID (WiFi network name) and WiFi password, double-click the SSID profile entry from the list. See Section 7.2.4.1 on page 76 for more information. Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard. Figure 35 Wizard: SSID 7.2.4.1 Edit SSID Profile Use this screen to configure an SSID profile. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 76 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard The screen varies depending on the security type you selected. SSID: Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters for the wireless LAN. VLAN ID: Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID. Band Mode: Select the wireless band which this profile should use. 2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. 5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients. Security Type: Select WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. Otherwise, select OPEN to allow any wireless client to associate this network without authentication. Personal: If you set Security Type to WPA2 and select Personal, enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters. Enterprise: Select this option and the Primary / Secondary RADIUS Server check box to have the Zyxel Device use the specified RADIUS server. You have to enter the IP address, port number and shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Click OK to proceed. Click Cancel to close the screen without saving. Figure 36 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-Personal) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 77 Chapter 7 Setup Wizard Figure 37 Wizard: SSID: Edit (WPA2-Enterprise) 7.2.5 Summary Use this screen to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Save to apply your settings and complete the wizard setup. Otherwise, click Prev to return to the previous screen or click Cancel to close the wizard without saving. Figure 38 Wizard: Summary NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 78 C H A P T E R 8 Monitor 8.1 Overview Use the Monitor screens to check status and statistics information. 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Network Status screen (Section 8.3 on page 80) displays general LAN interface information and packet statistics. The AP Information > Radio List screen (Section 8.4 on page 82) displays statistics about the wireless radio transmitters in the Zyxel Device. The Station Info screen (Section 8.5 on page 86) displays statistics pertaining to the associated The WDS Link Info screen (Section 8.6 on page 87) displays statistics about the Zyxel Devices WDS

(Wireless Distribution System) connections. The Detected Device screen (Section 8.7 on page 88) displays information about suspected rogue stations. APs. The View Log screen (Section 8.8 on page 91) displays the Zyxel Devices current log messages. You can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the log in this screen. 8.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through the chapter. Rogue APs are wireless access points operating in a networks coverage area that are not under the control of the networks administrators, and can open up holes in a networks security. See Chapter 14 on page 150 for details. Rogue AP Friendly AP Friendly APs are other wireless access points that are detected in your network, as well as any others that you know are not a threat (those from neighboring networks, for example). See Chapter 14 on page 150 for details. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 79 Chapter 8 Monitor 8.3 Network Status Use this screen to look at general Ethernet interface information and packet statistics. To access this screen, click Monitor > Network Status. Figure 39 Monitor > Network Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 29 Monitor > Network Status DESCRIPTION LABEL Interface Summary IPv6 Interface Summary Name Status Use the Interface Summary section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Interface Summary section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your Zyxel Device to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. This field displays the name of the physical Ethernet port on the Zyxel Device. This field displays the current status of each physical port on the Zyxel Device. Down - The port is not connected. Speed / Duplex - The port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting

(Full or Half). VID This field displays the VLAN ID to which the port belongs. IP Addr/Netmask IP Address This field displays the current IP address (and subnet mask) of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network) or :: (in the IPv6 network), the interface does not have an IP address yet. IP Assignment This field displays how the interface gets its IPv4 address. Static - This interface has a static IPv4 address. DHCP Client - This interface gets its IPv4 address from a DHCP server. Action Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to update its IP address, this field displays n/a. Port Statistics Table Poll Interval Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Set Interval. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 80 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 29 Monitor > Network Status (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Interval Click this to set the Poll Interval the screen uses. Switch to Graphic View Stop Name Status Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph. This field displays the name of the interface. This field displays the current status of the physical port. Down - The physical port is not connected. Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting the Poll Interval and clicking Set Interval. TxPkts RxPkts Tx Bcast Rx Bcast Tx Rx Speed / Duplex - The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the number of packets received by the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the number of broadcast packets transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the number of broadcast packets received by the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. Collisions This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-

second interval before the screen updated. This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-

second interval before the screen updated. Up Time This field displays how long the physical port has been connected. System Up Time This field displays how long the Zyxel Device has been running since it last restarted or was turned on. 8.3.1 Port Statistics Graph Use the port statistics graph to look at a line graph of packet statistics for the Ethernet port. To view, click Monitor > Network Status and then the Switch to Graphic View button. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 81 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 40 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Refresh Now Click this to update the information in the window right away. Port Selection Select the Ethernet port for which you want to view the packet statistics. Switch to Grid View Click this to display the port statistics as a table. Kbps/Mbps The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception. Time TX RX The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred. This line represents traffic transmitted from the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. This line represents the traffic received by the Zyxel Device on the physical port since it was last connected. Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated. 8.4 Radio List Use this screen to view statistics for the Zyxel Devices wireless radio transmitters. To access this screen, click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 82 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 41 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for Zyxel Device that supports WDS) Figure 42 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (for Zyxel Device that doesnt support WDS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List LABEL DESCRIPTION More Information Click this to view additional information about the selected radios wireless traffic and station count. Information spans a 24 hour period. This displays whether or not the radio is enabled. This indicates the APs load balance status (UnderLoad or OverLoad) when load balancing is enabled on the Zyxel Device. Otherwise, it shows - when load balancing is disabled or the radio is in monitor mode. MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the radio. This indicates the radio number on the Zyxel Device to which it belongs. This indicates the radios operating mode. Operating modes are AP (MBSSID), MONITOR, Root AP or Repeater Status Loading Radio OP Mode AP/WDS Profile This indicates the AP profile name and WDS profile name to which the radio belongs. This field is available only on the Zyxel Device that supports WDS. Profile This indicates the AP profile name to which the radio belongs. This field is available only on the Zyxel Device that doesnt support WDS. Frequency Band This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio. This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode. Channel This indicates the radios channel ID. Transmit Power This displays the output power of the radio. Station This displays the number of wireless clients connected to this radio on the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 83 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 31 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List (continued) LABEL Upload DESCRIPTION This displays the total number of packets received by the radio. Download This displays the total number of packets transmitted by the radio. Channel Utilization This indicates how much IEEE 802.11 traffic the radio can receive on the channel. It displays what percentage of the radios channel is currently being used. 8.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information This screen allows you to view a selected radios SSID details, wireless traffic statistics and station count for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select a radio and click the More Information button in the Radio List screen. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 84 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 43 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information LABEL SSID Detail DESCRIPTION This list shows information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the specified radio over the preceding 24 hours.

This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this list. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 85 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 32 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Name This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum. BSSID Security Mode VLAN This displays a BSSID associated with this radio. The BSSID is tied to the SSID. This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating. This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID. Traffic Statistics This graph displays the overall traffic information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours. Kbps/Mbps This y-axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio in megabytes per second. Time This x-axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio. Station Count This graph displays the connected station information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours Stations The y-axis represents the number of connected stations. Time The x-axis shows the time period over which a station was connected. Last Update This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated. OK Cancel Click this to close this window. Click this to close this window. 8.5 Station List Use this screen to view statistics pertaining to the associated stations (or wireless clients). Click Monitor

> Wireless > Station Info to access this screen. Figure 44 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info DESCRIPTION This is the stations index number in this list. IP Address This is the stations IP address. MAC Address This is the stations MAC address. LABEL

Radio Capability This is the radio number on the Zyxel Device to which the station is connected. This displays the supported standard currently being used by the station or the standards supported by the station. 802.11 Features This displays whether the station supports IEEE802.11r, IEEE 802.11k, IEEE 802.11v or none of the above (N/A). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 86 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 33 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info (continued) LABEL SSID Name DESCRIPTION This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single AP can have multiple SSIDs or networks. Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the station to connect to the network. Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the stations wireless connection. Tx Rate Rx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the station. This is the maximum reception rate of the station. Association Time This displays the time the station first associated with the Zyxel Devices wireless network. Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page. 8.6 WDS Link Info Use this screen to view the WDS traffic statistics between the Zyxel Device and a root AP or repeaters. See Section 1.2 on page 13 to know more about WDS. Click Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info to access this screen. Figure 45 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Uplink Info Uplink refers to the WDS link from the repeaters to the root AP. WDS Downlink Info Downlink refers to the WDS link from the root AP to the repeaters. When the Zyxel Device is in root AP mode and connected to a repeater, only the downlink information is displayed. When the Zyxel Device is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP directly or via another repeater, the uplink information is displayed. When the Zyxel Device is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP and other repeater(s), both the uplink and downlink information would be displayed.

This is the index number of the root AP or repeater in this list. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 87 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 34 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address This is the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. Radio SSID Name This is the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. Security Mode This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the Zyxel Device to connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS. Signal Strength This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the wireless connection in WDS. Tx Rate Rx Rate This is the maximum transmission rate of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. This is the maximum reception rate of the root AP or repeater to which the Zyxel Device is connected using WDS. Association Time This displays the time the Zyxel Device first associated with the wireless network using WDS. Refresh Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page. 8.7 Detected Device Use this screen to view information about surrounding APs which you could mark as Rogue or Friendly. Click Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device to access this screen. Not all Zyxel Devices support monitor mode (see Section 1.4 on page 19). For more information about Rogue APs, see Section 10.3 on page 109. Note: If the Zyxel Device supports monitor mode, the radio or at least one of the Zyxel Devices radio must be set to monitor mode (in the Wireless > AP Management screen) in order to detect other wireless devices in its vicinity. If the Zyxel Device doesnt support monitor mode, turn on rogue AP detection in the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen to detect other APs. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 88 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 46 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (for Zyxel Device that supports Monitor mode) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 89 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 47 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (for Zyxel Device that doesnt support Monitor mode) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device LABEL DESCRIPTION Discovered APs Rogue AP This shows how many devices are detected as rogue APs. Suspected rogue AP This shows how many devices are detected as possible rogue APs based on the classification rule(s) in Section 10.3 on page 109. Friendly AP This shows how many devices are detected as friendly APs. Un-classified AP This shows how many devices are detected, but have not been classified as either Rogue or Friendly by the Zyxel Device. Detect Now Click this button for the Zyxel Device to scan for APs in the network. Detected Device NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 90 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 35 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Mark as Rogue AP Click this button to mark the selected AP as a rogue AP. For more on managing rogue APs, see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109). Mark as Friendly AP Click this button to mark the selected AP as a friendly AP. For more on managing friendly APs, see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109).

Status Device Role This is the detected devices index number in this list. This indicates the detected devices status. This indicates the type of device detected. This indicates the detected devices role (such as friendly or rogue). Classified by This indicates the detected devices classification rule. MAC Address This indicates the detected devices MAC address. SSID Name This indicates the detected devices SSID. Channel ID This indicates the detected devices channel ID. 802.11 Mode This indicates the 802.11 mode (a/b/g/n/ac/ax) transmitted by the detected device. Security This indicates the encryption method (if any) used by the detected device. Description Last Seen Refresh This displays the detected devices description. For more on managing friendly and rogue APs, see the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109). This indicates the last time the device was detected by the Zyxel Device. Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page. 8.8 View Log Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can select a specific category of log messages (for example, user). You can also look at the debugging log by selecting Debug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority. To access this screen, click Monitor > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen. Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first. Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. The Web Configurator saves the filter settings once you click Search. If you leave the View Log screen and return to it later, the last filter settings would still apply. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 91 Chapter 8 Monitor Figure 48 Monitor > Log > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Monitor > Log > View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Filter / Hide Filter Click this button to show or hide the filter settings. Display Priority If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are available. If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available. Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one time, or you can view the Debug Log. This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error, warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the Category is Debug Log. Source Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 92 Chapter 8 Monitor Table 36 Monitor > Log > View Log (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter. Source Interface This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated the log message. Destination Interface Protocol Keyword This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message. This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would like to see. This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source, Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks

() ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed. Search This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter settings. Email Log Now Click this button to send log messages to the Active e-mail addresses specified in the Send Log To field on the Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings screen. Refresh Click this to update the list of logs. Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message. This field displays the time the log message was recorded. This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority field above. This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the Display and (other) Category fields. This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text [count=x], where x is a number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple entries were aggregated to generate into this one. This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the log message. Source Interface This field displays the source interface of the packet that generated the log message. This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated the log message. This field displays the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message. This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message. This field displays any additional information about the log message.

Time Priority Category Message Source Destination Destination Interface Protocol Note NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 93 C H A P T E R 9 Network 9.1 Overview This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your Zyxel Device. The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Figure 49 IP Setup The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your Zyxel Device. The gateway IP address is 192.168.1.1 and the managed IP address of the Zyxel Device is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the Zyxel Device is assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used. The gateway and the Zyxel Device must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate with each other. 9.1.1 AP Controller Management This discusses using the Zyxel Device with an AP Controller. AP Controllers, such as the NXC, use Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP) to push firmware and/or configurations to the APs that they manage. The following figure illustrates a wireless network managed by an AC. You (U) configure the AC (C), which then automatically updates the configurations of the managed APs (M1 ~ M4). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 94 Chapter 9 Network Figure 50 AC managed Network Example Note: The Zyxel Device can be a standalone device or be managed by an AC. AC Discovery and Management The link between AC Discovery-enabled access points proceeds as follows:

1 An Zyxel Device with AC Discovery enabled joins a wired network (receives a dynamic IP address). The Zyxel Device sends out a discovery request, looking for an AC. 2 3 If there is an AC on the network, it receives the discovery request. If the AC, such as NXC, is in Manual mode it adds the details of the Zyxel Device to its Unmanaged Access Points list, and you decide which available APs to manage. If the AC is in Always Accept mode, it automatically adds the Zyxel Device to its Managed Access Points list and provides the managed Zyxel Device with default configuration information, as well as securely transmitting the DTLS pre-shared key. The managed Zyxel Device is ready for association with wireless clients. Managed AP Finds the Controller A managed Zyxel Device can find the controller in one of the following ways:

Manually specify the controllers IP address in the Web Configurators AC Discovery screen. Get the controllers IP address from a DHCP server with the controllers IP address configured as option 138. Get the controllers IP address from a DNS server SRV (Service) record. Broadcasting to discover the controller within the broadcast domain. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 95 Chapter 9 Network Note: The AC needs to have a static IP address. If it is a DHCP client, set the DHCP server to reserve an IP address for the AC. AC management and IP Subnets By default, CAPWAP works only between Zyxel Devices with IP addresses in the same subnet. However, you can configure the Zyxel Device and the AC to use CAPWAP with IP addresses in different subnets by doing the following. Activate DHCP. Your networks DHCP server must support option 138 defined in RFC 5415. Configure DHCP option 138 with the IP address of the AC on your network. DHCP Option 138 allows the management request (from the Zyxel Device) to reach the AC in a different subnet, as shown in the following figure. Figure 51 CAPWAP and DHCP Option 138 Notes on AC management This section lists some additional features of Zyxels implementation of the CAPWAP protocol. When the AC uses its internal Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server, managed Zyxel Devices also use the ACs authentication server to authenticate wireless clients. If an Zyxel Devices link to the ACis broken, the Zyxel Device continues to use the wireless settings with which it was last provided. 9.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter The IP Setting screen (Section 9.2 on page 97) configures the Zyxel Devices LAN IP address. The VLAN screen (Section 9.3 on page 98) configures the Zyxel Devices VLAN settings. The Storm Control screen (Section 9.4 on page 101) turns on or off the traffic storm control feature on The AC Discovery screen (Section 9.5 on page 102) configures the Zyxel Devices AP Controller (AC) the Zyxel Device. settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 96 Chapter 9 Network The NCC Discovery screen (Section 9.6 on page 103) configures the Zyxel Devices Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery settings. 9.2 IP Setting Use this screen to configure the IP address for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > IP Setting. Figure 52 Configuration > Network > IP Setting Each field is described in the following table. Table 37 Configuration > Network > IP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Assignment Get Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The Zyxel Device sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. Use Fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 97 Chapter 9 Network Table 37 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the DNS server. DNS Server IP Address IPv6 Address Assignment Enable Stateless Address Auto-

configuration

(SLAAC) Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device will generate an IPv6 address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network. Link-Local Address This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the Zyxel Device generates itself for the LAN interface. IPv6 Address/

Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for the LAN interface if you want to use a static IP address. This field is optional. Gateway Metric The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on the LAN interface. The Zyxel Device decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the Zyxel Device uses the one that was configured first. Enter zero to set the metric to 1024 for IPv6. DHCPv6 Client Select this option to set the Zyxel Device to act as a DHCPv6 client. DUID This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the Zyxel Device, which is unique and used for identification purposes when the Zyxel Device is exchanging DHCPv6 messages with others. See Appendix B on page 273 for more information. Request Address Select this option to get an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server. Select this option to determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6 Request Options DNS Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the DNS server. NTP Server Select this option to obtain the IP address of the NTP server. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 9.3 VLAN This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Devices VLAN settings. Note: Misconfiguring the management VLAN settings in your Zyxel Device can make it inaccessible. If this happens, you will have to reset the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 98 Chapter 9 Network Figure 53 Management VLAN Setup In the figure above, to access and manage the Zyxel Device from computer A, the Zyxel Device and switch Bs ports to which computer A and the Zyxel Device are connected should be in the same VLAN. A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > VLAN. The screen varies depending on whether the Zyxel Device has an extra Ethernet port (except the uplink port). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 99 Chapter 9 Network Figure 54 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for Zyxel Device with multiple Ethernet ports) Figure 55 Configuration > Network > VLAN (for Zyxel Device with one Ethernet port) Each field is described in the following table. Table 38 Configuration > Network > VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Settings Management VLAN ID As Native VLAN LAN Setting Port Setting Edit Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device. Select this option to treat this VLAN ID as a VLAN created on the Zyxel Device and not one assigned to it from outside the network. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. Activate/

Inactivate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.

Status Port This is the index number of the port. This field displays the name of the port. This field indicates whether the port is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 100 Chapter 9 Network Table 38 Configuration > Network > VLAN (continued) DESCRIPTION This field displays the port number of the VLAN ID. VLAN Configuration LABEL PVID Add Edit Remove Activate/

Inactivate

Status Name VID Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entrys position in the numbered list is important (features where the Zyxel Device applies the tables entries in order like the SSID for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This is the index number of the VLAN ID This field indicates whether the VLAN is enabled (a yellow bulb) or not (a gray bulb). This field displays the name of each VLAN. This field displays the VLAN ID. Member This field displays the VLAN membership to which the port belongs. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 9.4 Storm Control Traffic storm control limits the number of broadcast and/or multicast packets the Zyxel Device receives on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast and/or multicast packets is reached, the subsequent packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast and/or multicast packets in your network. Note: The maximum traffic rate can be changed using the CLI (see the CLI Reference Guide). To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Storm Control. Figure 56 Configuration > Network > Storm Control NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 101 Chapter 9 Network Each field is described in the following table. Table 39 Configuration > Network > Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Broadcast Storm Control Select the check box to enable broadcast storm control on the Zyxel Device. Enabling this will drop ingress broadcast traffic in the physical Ethernet port if it exceeds the maximum traffic rate. Multicast Storm Control Select the check box to enable multicast storm control on the Zyxel Device. Enabling this will drop ingress multicast traffic in the physical Ethernet port if it exceeds the maximum traffic rate. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 9.5 AC (AP Controller) Discovery This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Devices AC Discovery settings. You can have the Zyxel Device managed by an AC on your network. When you do this, the Zyxel Device can be configured ONLY by the AC. See Section 9.1.1 on page 94 for more information on AC management. Note: The AC Discovery settings are not available in all Zyxel Devices. See Section 1.4 on page 19 for more information. If you want to return the Zyxel Device to function in standalone mode, you can do one of the two following options:

Press the Reset button. Check the AC for the Zyxel Devices IP address and use FTP to upload the default configuration file to the Zyxel Device. You can get the configuration file at conf/system-default.conf. You must reboot the Zyxel Device after uploading the configuration file. To access the Controller Discover screen, click Configuration > Network > AC Discovery. Figure 57 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 102 Chapter 9 Network Each field is described in the following table. Table 40 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery DESCRIPTION Discovery Setting LABEL Auto Manual Disable Select this option to use DHCP option 138/DNS SRV record/Broadcast to get the ACs IP address. If the Zyxel Device and a Zyxel AC, such as the NXC2500 or NXC5500, are in the same subnet, it will be managed by the controller automatically. Select this option and enter the IP address of the AC manually. This is necessary when the AP Controller is not in the same subnet and you want it to manage the Zyxel Device. Primary / Secondary Static AC IP Specify the primary and secondary IP address of the AC to which the Zyxel Device connects. Select this to manage the Zyxel Device using its own web configurator, neither managing nor being managed by other devices. Please note if an AP Controller is in the same subnet, you will need to click Disable if you do not want the Zyxel Device to be managed. Apply Click Apply to save the information entered in this screen. If you select Auto or Manual, the AC uploads the firmware package for managed AP mode to the Zyxel Device and you cannot log in as the web configurator is disabled;

you must manage the Zyxel Device through the AC on your network. Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 9.6 NCC Discovery You can manage the Zyxel Device through the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC). Use this screen to configure the proxy server settings if the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery. Figure 58 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 103 Chapter 9 Network Each field is described in the following table. Table 41 Configuration > Network > NCC Discovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Nebula Control Center Status Internet This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Internet. Nebula Connectivity This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC). Nebula Control Center Discovery Setting Enable Select this option to turn on NCC discovery on the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device will try to discover the NCC and go into NCC management mode when it is connected to the Internet and has been registered in the NCC. If NCC discovery is disabled, the Zyxel Device will not discover the NCC and remain in standalone operation. Use Proxy to Access NCC If the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure the proxy server settings so that the Zyxel Device can access the NCC through the proxy server. Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy Port Enter the service port number used by the proxy server. Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to the NCC. User Name Password Enter your proxy user name. Enter your proxy password. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 104 C H A P T E R 10 Wireless 10.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your Zyxel Device. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 59 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Zyxel Device is the AP. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The AP Management screen (Section 10.2 on page 106) allows you to manage the Zyxel Devices general wireless settings. the friendly AP list. The Rogue AP screen (Section 10.3 on page 109) allows you to assign APs either to the rogue AP list or The Load Balancing screen (Section 10.4 on page 114) allows you to configure network traffic load balancing between the APs and the Zyxel Device. The DCS screen (Section 10.5 on page 116) allows you to configure dynamic radio channel selection. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 105 Chapter 10 Wireless 10.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Station / Wireless Client A station or wireless client is any wireless-capable device that can connect to an AP using a wireless signal. Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is a feature that allows an AP to automatically select the radio channel which it broadcasts. For more information, see Section 10.6 on page 117. Load Balancing (Wireless) Wireless load balancing is the process where you limit the number of connections allowed on an wireless access point (AP) or you limit the amount of wireless traffic transmitted and received on it so the AP does not become overloaded. 10.2 AP Management Use this screen to manage the Zyxel Devices general wireless settings. Click Configuration > Wireless >

AP Management to access this screen. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 106 Chapter 10 Wireless Figure 60 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management Each field is described in the following table. Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Radio 1 Setting Radio 1 Activate Select the check box to enable the Zyxel Devices first (default) radio. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 107 Chapter 10 Wireless Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Radio 1 OP Mode Select the operating mode for radio 1. AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data traffic through to the Zyxel Device to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an upstream gateway for managing). MON Mode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their information on to the Zyxel Device where it can be determined if those APs are friendly or rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients (see Section 1.2.3 on page 15). Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to extend its wireless network. Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS. Radio 1 Profile Select the radio profile the radio uses. Note: You can only apply a 2.4G AP radio profile to radio 1. Otherwise, the first radio will not be working. Radio 1 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode. Uplink Selection Mode Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater. This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode. Select AUTO to have the Zyxel Device automatically use the settings in the applied WDS profile to connect to a root AP or repeater. Select Manual to have the Zyxel Device connect to the root AP or repeater with the MAC address specified in the Radio 1 Uplink MAC Address field. Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the Zyxel Device in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to reduce interference with other APs. Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Devices effective broadcast radius. MBSSID Settings Edit Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied.

This field shows the index number of the SSID SSID Profile This field displays the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile. Radio 2 Setting Radio 2 Activate This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio. Select the check box to enable the Zyxel Devices second radio. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 108 Chapter 10 Wireless Table 42 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Radio 2 OP Mode This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio. Select the operating mode for radio 2. AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data traffic through to the Zyxel Device to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an upstream gateway for managing). MON Mode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their information on to the Zyxel Device where it can be determined if those APs are friendly or rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients (see Section 1.2.3 on page 15). Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS to extend its wireless network. Repeater means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either root AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS. Radio 2 Profile This displays if the Zyxel Device has a second radio. Select the radio profile the radio uses. Note: You can only apply a 5G AP radio profile to radio 2. Otherwise, the second radio will not be working. Radio 2 WDS Profile This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Repeater mode. Uplink Selection Mode Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater. This field is available only when the radio is in Repeater mode. Select AUTO to have the Zyxel Device automatically use the settings in the applied WDS profile to connect to a root AP or repeater. Select Manual to have the Zyxel Device connect to the root AP or repeater with tbe MAC address specified in the Radio 2 Uplink MAC Address field. Max Output Power Enter the maximum output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the Zyxel Device in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the Zyxel Device to reduce interference with other APs. Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the Zyxel Devices effective broadcast radius. MBSSID Settings Edit

Apply Reset Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. This field shows the index number of the SSID SSID Profile This field shows the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.3 Rogue AP Use this screen to enable Rogue AP Detection and import/export a rogue or friendly AP list in a txt file. Click Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP to access this screen. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 109 Chapter 10 Wireless Rogue APs A rogue AP is a wireless access point operating in a networks coverage area that is not under the control of the network administrator, and which can potentially open up holes in a networks security. In the following example, a corporate networks security is compromised by a rogue AP (RG) set up by an employee at his workstation in order to allow him to connect his notebook computer wirelessly (A). The companys legitimate wireless network (the dashed ellipse B) is well-secured, but the rogue AP uses inferior security that is easily broken by an attacker (X) running readily available encryption-cracking software. In this example, the attacker now has access to the company network, including sensitive data stored on the file server (C). Figure 61 Rogue AP Example If you have more than one AP in your wireless network, you should also configure a list of friendly APs. Friendly APs are wireless access points that you know are not a threat. It is recommended that you export (save) your list of friendly APs often, especially if you have a network with a large number of access points. Exported lists show MAC addresses in txt file format separated by line breaks. Friendly APs Rogue AP Detection This feature allows the Zyxel Device to monitor the WiFi signals for other wireless APs (see also Section 1.2.3 on page 15). Detected APs will appear in the Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device screen, where the Zyxel Device will label APs with the criteria you select in Suspected Rogue AP Classification Rule as a suspected rogue. The APs which you mark as either rogue or friendly APs in the Monitor > Wireless >

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 110 Chapter 10 Wireless Detected Device screen will appear in the Wireless > Rogue AP screen. See Section 1.4 on page 19 to know which models support Rogue AP Detection. Note: Enabling Rogue AP Detection might affect the performance of wireless clients associated with the Zyxel Device. Figure 62 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (for Zyxel Devices that support Monitor mode) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 111 Chapter 10 Wireless Figure 63 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (for Zyxel Devices that support Rogue AP Detection) Each field is described in the following table. Table 43 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP LABEL DESCRIPTION Rogue AP Detection Setting Enable Rogue AP Detection Suspected Rogue AP Classification Rule Select this check box to detect Rogue APs in the network. Select the check boxes (Weak Security (Open, WEP, WPA-PSK), Hidden SSID, SSID Keyword) of the characteristics an AP should have for the Zyxel Device to mark it as a Rogue AP. Click this to add an SSID Keyword. Select an SSID Keyword and click this button to modify it. Remove Select an existing SSID keyword and click this button to delete it. This is the SSID Keywords index number in this list. SSID Keyword This field displays the SSID Keyword. Rogue/Friendly AP List Click this button to add an AP to the list and assign it either friendly or rogue status. Select an AP in the list to edit and reassign its status. Remove Select an AP in the list to remove. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. Add Edit

Add Edit

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 112 Chapter 10 Wireless Table 43 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP (continued) LABEL Role DESCRIPTION This field indicates whether the selected AP is a rogue-ap or a friendly-ap. To change the APs role, click the Edit button. MAC Address This field indicates the APs radio MAC address. Description This field displays the APs description. You can modify this by clicking the Edit button. Rogue/Friendly AP List Importing/Exporting These controls allow you to export the current list of rogue and friendly APs or import existing lists. File Path / Browse /

Importing Enter the file name and path of the list you want to import or click the Browse button to locate it. Once the File Path field has been populated, click Importing to bring the list into the Zyxel Device. You need to wait a while for the importing process to finish. Exporting Click this button to export the current list of either rogue APs or friendly APS. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List Click Add or select an AP and click the Edit button in the Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP table to display this screen. Figure 64 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List Each field is described in the following table. Table 44 Configuration > Wireless > Rogue AP > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List DESCRIPTION Enter the MAC address of the AP you want to add to the list. A MAC address is a unique hardware identifier in the following hexadecimal format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx where xx is a hexadecimal number separated by colons. Description Enter up to 60 characters for the APs description. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Select either Rogue AP or Friendly AP for the APs role. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to close the window with changes unsaved. LABEL MAC Role OK Cancel NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 113 Chapter 10 Wireless 10.4 Load Balancing Use this screen to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the APs on your network

(see Load Balancing on page 118). Click Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing to access this screen. Figure 65 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing Each field is described in the following table. Table 45 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Load Balancing Select this to enable load balancing on the Zyxel Device. Use this section to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the managed APs in this group. Mode Select a mode by which load balancing is carried out. Select By Station Number to balance network traffic based on the number of specified stations connected to the Zyxel Device. Select By Traffic Level to balance network traffic based on the volume generated by the stations connected to the Zyxel Device. Select By Smart Classroom to balance network traffic based on the number of specified stations connected to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device ignores association request and authentication request packets from any new station when the maximum number of stations is reached. If you select By Station Number or By Traffic Level, once the threshold is crossed (either the maximum station numbers or with network traffic), the Zyxel Device delays association request and authentication request packets from any new station that attempts to make a connection. This allows the station to automatically attempt to connect to another, less burdened AP if one is available. Enter the threshold number of stations at which the Zyxel Device begins load balancing its connections. Select the threshold traffic level at which the Zyxel Device begins load balancing its connections (Low, Medium, High). The maximum bandwidth allowed for each level is:

Low - 11 Mbps, Medium - 23 Mbps High - 35M bps Max Station Number Traffic Level NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 114 Chapter 10 Wireless Table 45 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Disassociate station when overloaded This function is enabled by default and the disassociation priority is always Signal Strength when you set Mode to By Smart Classroom. Select this option to disassociate wireless clients connected to the AP when it becomes overloaded. If you do not enable this option, then the AP simply delays the connection until it can afford the bandwidth it requires, or it transfers the connection to another AP within its broadcast radius. The disassociation priority is determined automatically by the Zyxel Device and is as follows:

Idle Timeout - Devices that have been idle the longest will be kicked first. If none of the connected devices are idle, then the priority shifts to Signal Strength. Signal Strength - Devices with the weakest signal strength will be kicked first. Note: If you enable this function, you should ensure that there are multiple APs within the broadcast radius that can accept any rejected or kicked wireless clients; otherwise, a wireless client attempting to connect to an overloaded AP will be disassociated permanently and never be allowed to connect. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections When your AP becomes overloaded, there are two basic responses it can take. The first one is to delay a client connection. This means that the AP withholds the connection until the data transfer throughput is lowered or the client connection is picked up by another AP. If the client is picked up by another AP then the original AP cannot resume the connection. For example, here the AP has a balanced bandwidth allotment of 6 Mbps. If laptop R connects and it pushes the AP over its allotment, say to 7 Mbps, then the AP delays the red laptops connection until it can afford the bandwidth or the laptop is picked up by a different AP with bandwidth to spare. Figure 66 Delaying a Connection NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 115 Chapter 10 Wireless The second response your AP can take is to disassociate with clients that are pushing it over its balanced bandwidth allotment. Figure 67 Disassociating with a client Connections are cut based on either idle timeout or signal strength. The Zyxel Device first looks to see which devices have been idle the longest, then starts kicking them in order of highest idle time. If no connections are idle, the next criteria the Zyxel Device analyzes is signal strength. Devices with the weakest signal strength are kicked first. 10.5 DCS Use this screen to configure dynamic radio channel selection (see Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) on page 106). Click Configuration > Wireless > DCS to access this screen. Figure 68 Configuration > Wireless > DCS Each field is described in the following table. Table 46 Configuration > Wireless > DCS LABEL DCS Now DESCRIPTION Click this to have the Zyxel Device scan for and select an available channel immediately. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 116 Chapter 10 Wireless Table 46 Configuration > Wireless > DCS (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.6 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this chapter. Dynamic Channel Selection When numerous APs broadcast within a given area, they introduce the possibility of heightened radio interference, especially if some or all of them are broadcasting on the same radio channel. If the interference becomes too great, then the network administrator must open his AP configuration options and manually change the channel to one that no other AP is using (or at least a channel that has a lower level of interference) in order to give the connected stations a minimum degree of interference. Dynamic channel selection frees the network administrator from this task by letting the AP do it automatically. The AP can scan the area around it looking for the channel with the least amount of interference. In the 2.4 GHz spectrum, each channel from 1 to 13 is broken up into discrete 22 MHz segments that are spaced 5 MHz apart. Channel 1 is centered on 2.412 GHz while channel 13 is centered on 2.472 GHz. Figure 69 An Example Three-Channel Deployment Three channels are situated in such a way as to create almost no interference with one another if used exclusively: 1, 6 and 11. When an AP broadcasts on any of these three channels, it should not interfere with neighboring APs as long as they are also limited to same trio. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 117 Chapter 10 Wireless Figure 70 An Example Four-Channel Deployment However, some regions require the use of other channels and often use a safety scheme with the following four channels: 1, 4, 7 and 11. While they are situated sufficiently close to both each other and the three so-called safe channels (1,6 and 11) that interference becomes inevitable, the severity of it is dependent upon other factors: proximity to the affected AP, signal strength, activity, and so on. Finally, there is an alternative four channel scheme for ETSI, consisting of channels 1, 5, 9, 13. This offers significantly less overlap that the other one. Figure 71 An Alternative Four-Channel Deployment Load Balancing Because there is a hard upper limit on an APs wireless bandwidth, load balancing can be crucial in areas crowded with wireless users. Rather than let every user connect and subsequently dilute the available bandwidth to the point where each connecting device receives a meager trickle, the load balanced AP instead limits the incoming connections as a means to maintain bandwidth integrity. There are three kinds of wireless load balancing available on the Zyxel Device:

Load balancing by station number limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP. If you know exactly how many stations you want to let connect, choose this option. For example, if your companys graphic design team has their own AP and they have 10 computers, you can load balance for 10. Later, if someone from the sales department visits the graphic design teams offices for a meeting and he tries to access the network, his computers connection is delayed, giving it the opportunity to connect to a different, neighboring AP. If he still connects to the AP regardless of the delay, then the AP may boot other people who are already connected in order to associate with the new connection. Load balancing by smart classroom also limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP. But any new connections will be just rejected when the AP is overloaded. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 118 Chapter 10 Wireless Load balancing by traffic level limits the number of connections to the AP based on maximum bandwidth available. If you are uncertain as to the exact number of wireless connections you will have then choose this option. By setting a maximum bandwidth cap, you allow any number of devices to connect as long as their total bandwidth usage does not exceed the configured bandwidth cap associated with this setting. Once the cap is hit, any new connections are rejected or delayed provided that there are other APs in range. Imagine a coffee shop in a crowded business district that offers free wireless connectivity to its customers. The coffee shop owner cant possibly know how many connections his AP will have at any given moment. As such, he decides to put a limit on the bandwidth that is available to his customers but not on the actual number of connections he allows. This means anyone can connect to his wireless network as long as the AP has the bandwidth to spare. If too many people connect and the AP hits its bandwidth cap then all new connections must basically wait for their turn or get shunted to the nearest identical AP. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 119 C H A P T E R 11 Bluetooth 11.1 Overview Use this screen to configure the iBeacon advertising settings for the Zyxel Device that supports Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE). Bluetooth Low Energy, which is also known as Bluetooth Smart, transmits less data over a shorter distance but consumes less power than classic Bluetooth. On the WAC5302D-S, you need to attach a supported BLE USB dongle to its USB port to have the AP act as a beacon to broadcast packets. Contact Zyxel customer support if you are not sure whether your BLE USB dongle is compatible with the Zyxel Device. 11.1.1 What You Need To Know iBeacon is Apples communication protocol on top of Bluetooth Low Energy wireless technology. Beacons (Bluetooth radio transmitters) or BLE enabled devices broadcast packets to every device around it to announce their presence. Advertising packets contain their iBeacon ID, which consists of the Universally Unique Identifier (UUID), major number, and minor number. These packets also contain a TX (transmit) power measured at a reference point, which is used to approximate a devices distance from the beacon. The UUID can be used to identify a service, a device, a manufacturer or an owner. The 2-byte major number is to identify and distinguish a group, and the 2-byte minor number is to identify and distinguish an individual. For example, a company can set all its beacons to share the same UUID. The beacons in a particular branch uses the same major number, and each beacon in a branch can have its own minor number. COMPANY A BRANCH X BRANCH Y BEACON 1 BEACON 2 BEACON 3 UUID Major Minor EBAECFAF-DFE0-4039-BE5A-F030EED4303C 10 1 10 2 20 1 Developers can create apps that respond to the iBeacon ID that your Zyxel Device broadcasts. An app that is associated with the Zyxel Devices iBeacon ID can measure the proximity of a customer to a beacon. This app can then push messages or trigger prompts and actions based on this information. This allows you to send highly contextual and highly localized advertisements to customers. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 120 Chapter 11 Bluetooth 11.2 Bluetooth Advertising Settings The Zyxel Device communicates with another BLE enabled device for advertisements. Use this screen to configure up to five beacon IDs to be included in the advertising packet. To access this screen, click Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings. Figure 72 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings DESCRIPTION Click this to edit the selected entry. Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This field shows whether or not the entry is activated. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This field indicates the UUID to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets. This field indicates the major number to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets. This field indicates the minor number to be included in the Bluetooth advertising packets. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. LABEL Edit

Status UUID Major Minor Apply Reset 11.2.1 Edit Advertising Settings Select an entry in the Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings screen and click the Edit icon to open the Edit Advertising screen. Use this screen to configure the beacon ID in the Bluetooth advertising packets. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 121 Chapter 11 Bluetooth Figure 73 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Configuration > Bluetooth > Advertising Settings > Edit DESCRIPTION Select this option to enable the advertising settings. Generate new UUID LABEL Activate UUID Major Minor OK Cancel To specify a UUID for the Zyxel Devices beacon ID, enter 32 hexadecimal digits in the range of A-F, a-f and 0-9, split into five groups separated by hyphens (-). The UUID format is as follows: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx (8-4-4-4-12) Click this button to have the Zyxel Device generate a new UUID automatically. Enter an integer from 0 to 65535 as the major value to identify the group to which the beacon belongs. Enter an integer from 0 to 65535 as the minor value to identify the individual beacon. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 122 C H A P T E R 12 User 12.1 Overview This chapter describes how to set up user accounts and user settings for the Zyxel Device. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The User screen (see Section 12.2 on page 124) provides a summary of all user accounts. The Setting screen (see Section 12.3 on page 126) controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the Zyxel Device. 12.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the Zyxel Device. User accounts are used in controlling access to configuration and services in the Zyxel Device. User Account User Types These are the types of user accounts the Zyxel Device uses. Table 49 Types of User Accounts TYPE ABILITIES Admin Users LOGIN METHOD(S) admin Change Zyxel Device configuration (web, CLI) WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP limited-admin Look at Zyxel Device configuration (web, CLI) WWW, TELNET, SSH Access Users user Perform basic diagnostics (CLI) Used for the embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access Browse user-mode commands (CLI) Note: The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the authentication method setting. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 123 Chapter 12 User 12.2 User Summary The User screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen click Configuration >

Object > User. Figure 74 Configuration > Object > User The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Configuration > Object > User DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. LABEL Add Edit Remove Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Object Reference Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry.

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. User Name This field displays the user name of each user. User Type This field displays type of user this account was configured as. admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to user - this user has access to the Zyxel Devices services but cannot look at the change it configuration Description This field displays the description for each user. 12.2.1 Add/Edit User The User Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one. 12.2.1.1 Rules for User Names Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters. The user name can only contain the following characters:

Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support) _ [underscores]

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 124 Chapter 12 User

- [dashes]

The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other limitations on user names are:

User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS or FTP, it will use the account settings used for 'BOB' not bob. User names have to be different than user group names. Here are the reserved user names:

adm admin any bin daemon debug devicehaecived ftp games halt ldap-users lp mail news nobody operator radius-users root shutdown sshd sync uucp zyxel To access this screen, go to the User screen, and click Add or Edit. Figure 75 Configuration > Object > User > Add/Edit A User The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-

sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some words are reserved. User Type Select what type of user this is. Choices are:

admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to change it user - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 - 63 alphanumeric characters. Re-enter the password to make sure you have entered it correctly. Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Default descriptions are provided. Password Retype Description NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 125 Chapter 12 User Table 51 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Timeout Settings This field is not available if the user type is user. If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings, select Use Manual Settings then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow. Lease Time This field is not available if the user type is user. Enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Reauthentication Time This field is not available if the user type is user. Type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the Zyxel Device in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 12.3 Setting This screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the Zyxel Device. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User > Setting. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 126 Chapter 12 User Figure 76 Configuration > Object > User > Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Configuration > Object > User > Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION User Default Setting Default Authentication Timeout Settings Edit

These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a new user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user accounts authentication timeout settings. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. User Type These are the kinds of user account the Zyxel Device supports. admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to change it user - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the Zyxel Device in one session before having to log in again. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. Lease Time Reauthentication Time User Logon Settings NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 127 Chapter 12 User Table 52 Configuration > Object > User > Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Limit the number of simultaneous logons for administration account Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can login as many times as they want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses. Maximum number per administration account This field is effective when Limit ... for administration account is checked. Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user. User Lockout Settings Enable logon retry limit Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked out for a specified amount of time. Maximum retry count This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the maximum number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP address is locked out for the specified lockout period. The number must be between 1 and 99. Lockout period This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the number of minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon retry limit is enabled and the maximum retry count is reached. This number must be between 1 and 65,535 (about 45.5 days). Apply Reset Click Apply to save the changes. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 12.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings This screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of user account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user accounts authentication timeout settings. To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Object > User > Setting screen, select one of the Default Authentication Timeout Settings entry and click the Edit icon. Figure 77 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 128 Chapter 12 User The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings LABEL User Type DESCRIPTION This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the default settings. admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the Zyxel Device. limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the Zyxel Device but not to change it. Lease Time Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically, the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires. Reauthentication Time Type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the Zyxel Device in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 129 C H A P T E R 13 AP Profile 13.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure preset profiles for the Zyxel Device. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Radio screen (Section 13.2 on page 131) creates radio configurations that can be used by the The SSID screen (Section 13.3 on page 137) configures three different types of profiles for your APs. networked APs. Wireless Profiles 13.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the Zyxel Device are profiles. A profile represents a group of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the following wireless profile types:

Radio - This profile type defines the properties of an APs radio transmitter. You can have a maximum of 64 radio profiles on the Zyxel Device. SSID - This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by an AP. Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 64 SSID profiles on the Zyxel Device. Security - This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the encryption method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a maximum of 64 security profiles on the Zyxel Device. MAC Filtering - This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to block access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a clients MAC address is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the MAC Filter profile. You can have a maximum of 64 MAC filtering profiles on the Zyxel Device. Layer-2 Isolation - This profile defines the MAC addresses of the devices that you want to allow the associated wireless clients to have access to when layer-2 isolation is enabled. SSID The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. In other words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 130 Chapter 13 AP Profile WEP WPA2 IEEE 802.1x WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP and the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and decryption. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external RADIUS server. IEEE 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming IEEE 802.11k is a standard for radio resource management of wireless LANs, which allows clients to request neighbor lists from the connected AP and discover the best available AP when roaming. An 802.11k neighbor list can contain up to six BSSIDs with the highest RCPI (Received Channel Power Indicator) value in both bands (5 GHz and 2.4 GHz, in the ratio of 4:2). The IEEE 802.11v BSS Transition Management feature lets an AP automatically provide load information of the neighbor APs to clients. It helps the Zyxel Device steer clients to a suitable AP for better performance or load balancing. 13.2 Radio This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the Zyxel Device. A radio profile is a list of settings that an Zyxel Device can use to configure its radio transmitter(s). To access this screen click Configuration >

Object > AP Profile. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 131 Chapter 13 AP Profile Figure 78 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new radio profile. Click this to edit the selected radio profile. Click this to remove the selected radio profile. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Object Reference

Status Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. This field shows whether or not the entry is activated. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile. Frequency Band This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 13.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 132 Chapter 13 AP Profile Figure 79 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to hide or show the Advanced Settings in this window. Hide / Show Advanced Settings General Settings Activate Select this option to make this profile active. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 133 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profiles name. Spaces and underscores are allowed. 802.11 Band Select whether this radio would use the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz band. 802.11 Mode Select how to let wireless clients connect to the AP. If 802.11 Band is set to 2.4G:

Channel Width Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network. 11b/g: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices. 11n: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. 11ax: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, and IEEE802.11ax compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isnt compatible with 802.11ax, the Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11n, and so on. If 802.11 Band is set to 5G:

Device. with the Zyxel Device. 11a: allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel 11n: allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate 11ac: allows IEEE802.11n, IEEE802.11a, and IEEE802.11ac compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isnt compatible with 802.11ac, the Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11n, and so on. 11ax: allows IEEE802.11n, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11ac, and IEEE802.11ax compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. If the WLAN device isnt compatible with 802.11ax, the Zyxel Device will communicate with the WLAN device using 802.11ac, and so on. Select 20 MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood. Select 20/40 MHz to allow the Zyxel Device to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40 MHz) that has least interference. Select 20/40/80 MHz to allow the Zyxel Device to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40 or 80 MHz) that has least interference. This option is available only when you select 11ac or 11ax in the 802.11 Mode field. Note: If the environment has poor signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), the Zyxel Device will switch to a lower bandwidth. This is the radio channel which the signal will use for broadcasting by this radio profile. DCS: Choose Dynamic Channel Selection to have the Zyxel Device choose a radio channel that has least interference. Manual: Choose from the available radio channels in the list. If your Zyxel Device is outdoor type, be sure to choose non-indoors channels. Channel Selection Enable DCS Client Aware Select this to have the Zyxel Device switch channels only when there are no clients connected to it. If there is a client connected, the Zyxel Device will not switch channels but generate a log. The Zyxel Device tries to scan and switch channels again at the end of the specified time interval or at the scheduled time. Blacklist DFS channels in presence of radar If you disable this then the Zyxel Device switches channels immediately regardless of any client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the Zyxel Device when it switches channels are dropped. This field is available if 802.11 Band is set to 5G and Channel Selection is set to DCS. Enable this to temporarily blacklist the wireless channels in the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) range whenever a radar signal is detected by the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 134 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DCS Client Aware This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS. 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS. Select this to have the Zyxel Device switch channels only when there are no clients connected to it. If there is a client connected, the Zyxel Device will not switch channels but generate a log. The Zyxel Device tries to scan and switch channels again at the end of the specified time interval or at the scheduled time. If you disable this then the Zyxel Device switches channels immediately regardless of any client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the Zyxel Device when it switches channels are dropped. Select how you want to specify the channels the Zyxel Device switches between for 2.4 GHz operation. Select auto to have the Zyxel Device display a 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment field you can use to limit channel switching to 3 or 4 channels. Select manual to select the individual channels the Zyxel Device switches between. Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or any one of the previously selected channels is not supported. Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method to manual. Select the channels that you want the Zyxel Device to use. 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment This is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS and the 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method is set to auto. Select Three-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to channels 1,6, and 11, the three channels that are sufficiently attenuated to have almost no impact on one another. In other words, this allows you to minimize channel interference by limiting channel-

hopping to these three safe channels. Select Four-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to four channels. Depending on the country domain, if the only allowable channels are 1-11 then the Zyxel Device uses channels 1, 4, 7, 11 in this configuration; otherwise, the Zyxel Device uses channels 1, 5, 9, 13 in this configuration. Four channel deployment expands your pool of possible channels while keeping the channel interference to a minimum. Enable 5 GHz DFS Aware This field is available only when you select 5G in the 802.11 Band field, set Channel Selection to DCS and set 5 GHz Channel Selection Method to auto. Select this if your APs are operating in an area known to have RADAR devices. This allows the Zyxel Device to downgrade its frequency to below 5 GHz in the event RADAR signal is detected, thus preventing it from interfering with that signal. Enabling this forces the AP to select a non-DFS channel. 5 GHz Channel Selection Method Select how you want to specify the channels the Zyxel Device switches between for 5 GHz operation. Select Auto to have the Zyxel Device automatically select the best channel. Select manual to select the individual channels the Zyxel Device switches between. Note: The method is automatically set to auto when no channel is selected or any one of the previously selected channels is not supported. Channel ID This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 5 GHz Channel Selection Method to manual. Select the channels that you want the Zyxel Device to use. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 135 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Time Interval Select this option to have the Zyxel Device survey the other APs within its broadcast radius at the end of the specified time interval. DCS Time Interval This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS and select the Time Interval option. Schedule Start Time Week Days Advanced Settings Guard Interval Enter a number of minutes. This regulates how often the Zyxel Device surveys the other APs within its broadcast radius. If the channel on which it is currently broadcasting suddenly comes into use by another AP, the Zyxel Device will then dynamically select the next available clean channel or a channel with lower interference. Select this option to have the Zyxel Device survey the other APs within its broadcast radius at a specific time on selected days of the week. Specify the time of the day (in 24-hour format) to have the Zyxel Device use DCS to automatically scan and find a less-used channel. Select each day of the week to have the Zyxel Device use DCS to automatically scan and find a less-used channel. This field is available only when the channel width is 20/40MHz or 20/40/80MHz and the 802.11 Mode is either 11n or 11ac. Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either short or long. The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also increases interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also reduces interference. Enable A-MPDU Aggregation This field is not available when you set 802.11 Mode to 11a or 11b/g. Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation. Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with their 802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error rates. Enable A-MSDU Aggregation This field is not available when you set 802.11 Mode to 11a or 11b/g. Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation. RTS/CTS Threshold Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless clients Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of their 802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more efficient than A-MPDU except in environments that are prone to high error rates. that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When enabled, a wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS (Clear To Send) before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting packets at the same time

(and causing data collisions). A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that you enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to turn RTS/

CTS off. When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the Zyxel Device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 136 Beacon Interval DTIM Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 55 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio > Add/Edit Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Signal Threshold Select the check box to use the signal threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP. Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength to connect to the AP. Station Signal Threshold Set a minimum client signal strength. A wireless client is allowed to connect to the AP only when its signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold.

-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -105 is the weakest. Disassociate Station Threshold Set a minimum kick-off signal strength. When a wireless clients signal strength is lower than the specified threshold, the Zyxel Device disconnects the wireless client from the AP. Allow Station Connection after Multiple Retries Station Retry Count Allow 802.11n/

ac/ax stations only Multicast Settings Transmission Mode

-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -105 is the weakest. Select this option to allow a wireless client to try to associate with the AP again after it is disconnected due to weak signal strength. Set the maximum number of times a wireless client can attempt to re-connect to the AP Select this option to allow only 802.11 n/ac/ax clients to connect, and reject 802.11a/b/g clients. Specify how the Zyxel Device handles wireless multicast traffic. Select Multicast to Unicast to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless clients as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the applications bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces duplicate packets. Select Fixed Multicast Rate to send multicast traffic to all wireless clients at a single data rate. You must know the multicast applications bandwidth requirements and set it in the following field. Multicast Rate(Mbps) If you set Transmission Mode to Fixed Multicast Rate, select a data rate at which the Zyxel Device transmits multicast packets to wireless clients. For example, to deploy 4 Mbps video, select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 13.3 SSID 13.3.1 SSID List The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an SSID list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can assign specific encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them; and a MAC filter list, which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses. This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An SSID, or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless client can connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for wireless frequencies NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 137 Chapter 13 AP Profile

(such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network name when a person makes a connection to it. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List. Note: You cannot add or remove an SSID profile after running the setup wizard. Figure 80 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (Default) Figure 81 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (After wizard setup) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List LABEL Add DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new SSID profile. This button is not available after you configure the Zyxel Deviceusing the wizard. Edit Click this to edit the selected SSID profile. Remove Click this to remove the selected SSID profile. This button is not available after you configure the Zyxel Deviceusing the wizard. Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example, radio profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile. This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients.

SSID NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 138 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 56 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Profile This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile. QoS This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile. This field indicates which (if any) MAC filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile. MAC Filtering Profile Layer-2 Isolation Profile This field indicates which (if any) layer-2 isolation Profile is associated with the SSID profile. VLAN ID This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile. 13.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button. Figure 82 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 139 Chapter 13 AP Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Create new Object Profile Name Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile. Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. SSID Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless clients. Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed. Security Profile Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one. Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to enhance your network security. MAC Filtering Profile Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one. MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not in the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections. The disable setting means no MAC filtering is used. Layer-2 Isolation Profile Select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one. Layer-2 isolation allows you to prevent wireless clients associated with your Zyxel Device from communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network. The disable setting means no layer-2 isolation is used. QoS Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access categories minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain categories, such as video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive nature of their data packets. QoS access categories are as follows:

disable: Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged with access categories. WMM: Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The Zyxel Device assigns access categories to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess effort. If something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such. WMM_VOICE: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is recommended if an SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls. WMM_VIDEO: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is recommended for activities like video conferencing. WMM_BEST_EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as best effort, meaning the data travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good for activities that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the Internet. WMM_BACKGROUND: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or background traffic, meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If traffic from an SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access category is recommended. For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected to it. Rate Limiting Downlink Define the maximum incoming transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a per-station basis. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 140 Chapter 13 AP Profile Enable Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking Enable U-APSD Table 57 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Uplink Define the maximum outgoing transmission data rate (either in mbps or kbps) on a per-station basis. VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID. Hidden SSID Select this if you want to hide your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless clients in the vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a potential connection. Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway. When a SSID is hidden and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect to the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup screen(s)

(these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system). Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID on the Zyxel Device. Select this option to enable Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD), which is also known as WMM-Power Save. This helps increase battery life for battery-powered wireless clients connected to the Zyxel Device using this SSID profile. Enable Proxy ARP The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an IP address to a MAC address. An ARP broadcast is sent to all devices in the same Ethernet network to request the MAC address of a target IP address. Select this option to allow the Zyxel Device to answer ARP requests for an IP address on behalf of a client associated with this SSID. This can reduce broadcast traffic and improve network performance. 802.11k/v Assisted Roaming Select this option to enable IEEE 802.11k/v assisted roaming on the Zyxel Device. When the connected clients request 802.11k neighbor lists, the Zyxel Device will response with a list of neighbor APs that can be candidates for roaming. Schedule SSID Select this option and set whether the SSID is enabled or disabled on each day of the week. You also need to select the hour and minute (in 24-hour format) to specify the time period of each day during which the SSID is enabled/enabled. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 13.4 Security List This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations that are connected to it. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 141 Chapter 13 AP Profile Figure 83 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new security profile. Click this to edit the selected security profile. Click this to remove the selected security profile. LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference

Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile. Security Mode This field indicates this profiles security mode (if any). Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for example, SSID profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. 13.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button. Note: This screens options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default screen is displayed here. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 142 Chapter 13 AP Profile Figure 84 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 143 Chapter 13 AP Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION General Settings Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Security Mode Select a security mode from the list: none, enhanced-open, wep, wpa2, wpa2-mix or wpa3. enhanced-open uses Opportunistic Wireless Encryption (OWE) which encrypts the wireless connection when possible. Authentication Settings Enterprise Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication with a RADIUS server. ReAuthentication Timer Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited time. Personal This field is available when you select the wpa2, wpa2-mix or wpa3 security mode. Pre-Shared Key Transition Mode Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) with WPA2 encryption or Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) with WPA3 encryption. Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters. Enable this for backwards compatibility. This option is only available if the Security Mode is wpa3 or enhanced-open. This creates two virtual APs (VAPs) with a primary (wpa3 or enhanced-open) and fallback (wpa2 or none) security method. If the Security Mode is wpa3, enabling this will force Management Frame Protection to be set to Optional. If this is disabled or if the Security Mode is enhanced-open, Management Frame Protection will be set to Required. Cipher Type Select an encryption cipher type from the list. auto - This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in use by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection. aes - This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more recent development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients may support this. Idle Timeout Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is discontinued. Authentication Type Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Open or Share key. Key Length Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections. If you select WEP-64:

Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of A-F, a-f and 0-9 (for example, 0x11AA22BB33) for each Key used. or or Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from a-z, A-Z and 0-9 (for example, MyKey) for each Key used. If you select WEP-128:

Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of A-F, a-f and 0-9 (for example, 0x00112233445566778899AABBCC) for each Key used. Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from a-z, A-Z and 0-9 (for example, MyKey12345678) for each Key used. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 144 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Key 1~4 Group Key Update Timer Based on your Key Length selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or ASCII key. Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA2 encryption key. Management Frame Protection This field is available only when you select wpa2 in the Security Mode field and set Cipher Type to aes. Data frames in 802.11 WLANs can be encrypted and authenticated with WEP, WPA or WPA2. But 802.11 management frames, such as beacon/probe response, association request, association response, de-authentication and disassociation are always unauthenticated and unencrypted. IEEE 802.11w Protected Management Frames allows APs to use the existing security mechanisms (encryption and authentication methods defined in IEEE 802.11i WPA/WPA2) to protect management frames. This helps prevent wireless DoS attacks. Select the check box to enable management frame protection (MFP) to add security to 802.11 management frames. Select Optional if you do not require the wireless clients to support MFP. Management frames will be encrypted if the clients support MFP. Select Required and wireless clients must support MFP in order to join the Zyxel Devices wireless network. This shows External and the Zyxel Device uses an external RADIUS server for authentication. Select this to have the Zyxel Device use the specified RADIUS server. Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Radius Settings Radius Server Type Primary / Secondary Radius Server Activate Radius Server IP Address Primary / Secondary Accounting Server Activate Accounting Server IP Address Accounting Server Port Radius Server Port Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Radius Server Secret Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Select the check box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server. Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Accounting Share Secret Enter a password (up to 128 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the Zyxel Device. The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your Zyxel Device. The key is not sent over the network. Accounting Interim Update This field is available only when you enable user accounting through an external authentication server. Select this to have the Zyxel Device send subscriber status updates to the accounting server at the interval you specify. Interim Update Interval Specify the time interval for how often the Zyxel Device is to send a subscriber status update to the accounting server. General Server Settings NAS IP Address If the RADIUS server requires the Zyxel Device to provide the NAS (Network Access Server) IP address attribute, enter it here. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 145 Chapter 13 AP Profile Table 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION NAS Identifier If the RADIUS server requires the Zyxel Device to provide the NAS (Network Access Server) identifier attribute, enter it here. The NAS identifier is to identify the source of access request. It could be the NASs fully qualified domain name. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 13.5 MAC Filter List This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the Zyxel Device. Figure 85 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile. Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile. Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile. LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for example, SSID profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile. Filter Action This field indicates this profiles filter action (if any). 13.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button. Note: Each MAC filtering profile can include a maximum of 512 MAC addresses. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 146 Chapter 13 AP Profile Figure 86 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Select allow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect to the network through the associated SSID; select deny to block the wireless clients with the specified MAC addresses. Click this to add a MAC address to the profiles list. Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profiles list. Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profiles list. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to make it editable. This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Profile Name Filter Action Add Edit

MAC Description OK Cancel 13.6 Layer-2 Isolation List Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent wireless clients associated with your Zyxel Device from communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network. In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the Zyxel Device to allow a guest wireless client

(A) to access the main network router (B). The router provides access to the Internet and the network printer (C) while preventing the client from accessing other computers and servers on the network. The client can communicate with other wireless clients only if Intra-BSS Traffic blocking is disabled. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 147 Chapter 13 AP Profile Note: Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking is activated when you enable layer-2 isolation. Figure 87 Layer-2 Isolation Application MAC addresses that are not listed in the layer-2 isolation table are blocked from communicating with the Zyxel Devices wireless clients except for broadcast packets. Layer-2 isolation does not check the traffic between wireless clients that are associated with the same AP. Intra-BSS traffic allows wireless clients associated with the same AP to communicate with each other. This screen allows you to specify devices you want the users on your wireless networks to access. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List. Figure 88 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new layer-2 isolation profile. Click this to edit the selected layer-2 isolation profile. Click this to remove the selected layer-2 isolation profile. LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference

Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected layer-2 isolation profile (for example, SSID profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the layer-2 isolation profile. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 148 Chapter 13 AP Profile 13.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile This screen allows you to create a new layer-2 isolation profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list and click the Edit button. Note: You need to know the MAC address of each wireless client, AP, computer or router that you want to allow to communicate with the Zyxel Device's wireless clients. Figure 89 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Click this to add a MAC address to the profiles list. Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profiles list. Remove Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profiles list. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the MAC address to make it editable. This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Add Edit

MAC Description OK Cancel NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 149 C H A P T E R 14 MON Profile 14.1 Overview This screen allows you to set up monitor mode configurations that allow your Zyxel Device to scan for other wireless devices in the vicinity. Once detected, you can use the Wireless > MON Mode screen

(Section 10.3 on page 109) to classify them as either rogue or friendly. Not all Zyxel Devices support monitor mode and rogue APs detection. 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The MON Profile screen (Section 14.2 on page 150) creates preset monitor mode configurations that can be used by the Zyxel Device. 14.2 MON Profile This screen allows you to create monitor mode configurations that can be used by the APs. To access this screen, log into the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > MON Profile. Figure 90 Configuration > Object > MON Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Configuration > Object > MON Profile DESCRIPTION LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Click this to add a new monitor mode profile. Click this to edit the selected monitor mode profile. Click this to remove the selected monitor mode profile. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 150

Chapter 14 MON Profile Table 64 Configuration > Object > MON Profile (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Object Reference

Status Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected monitor mode profile (for example, an AP management profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This field shows whether or not the entry is activated. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor profile. 14.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile This screen allows you to create a new monitor mode profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select and existing monitor mode profile and click the Edit button. See Section 1.2.3 on page 15 for more information about MON Mode. Figure 91 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 151 Chapter 14 MON Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile LABEL Activate DESCRIPTION Select this to activate this monitor mode profile. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor mode profile. Channel dwell time Enter the interval (in milliseconds) before the Zyxel Device switches to another channel for monitoring. Scan Channel Mode Select auto to have the Zyxel Device switch to the next sequential channel once the Channel dwell time expires. Select manual to set specific channels through which to cycle sequentially when the Channel dwell time expires. Selecting this options makes the Scan Channel List options available. Set Scan Channel List

(2.4 GHz) Select one or more than one channel to have the Zyxel Device using this profile scan the channel(s) when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual. These channels are limited to the 2.4 GHz range (802.11 b/g/n/ax). Set Scan Channel List

(5 GHz) Select one or more than one channel to have the Zyxel Device using this profile scan the channel(s) when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual. These channels are limited to the 5 GHz range (802.11 a/n/ac/ax). Not all Zyxel Devices support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 152 C H A P T E R 15 WDS Profile 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure WDS (Wireless Distribution System) profiles for the Zyxel Device to form a WDS with other APs. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The WDS Profile screen (Section 15.2 on page 153) creates preset WDS configurations that can be used by the Zyxel Device. 15.2 WDS Profile This screen allows you to manage and create WDS profiles that can be used by the APs. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > WDS Profile. Figure 92 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new profile. Click this to edit the selected profile. Remove Click this to remove the selected profile.

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. Profile Name This field indicates the name assigned to the profile. WDS SSID This field shows the SSID specified in this WDS profile. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 153 Chapter 15 WDS Profile 15.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile This screen allows you to create a new WDS profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select and existing profile and click the Edit button. Figure 93 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. WDS SSID Pre-Shared Key OK Cancel Enter the SSID with which you want the Zyxel Device to connect to a root AP or repeater to form a WDS. Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters. The key is used to encrypt the traffic between the APs. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 154 C H A P T E R 16 Certificates 16.1 Overview The Zyxel Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The My Certificates screens (Section 16.2 on page 158) generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the Zyxel Devices CA-signed certificates. The Trusted Certificates screens (Section 16.3 on page 165) save CA certificates and trusted remote host certificates to the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device trusts any valid certificate that you have imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the certificates that you have imported as a trusted certificate. 16.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure. These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as digital signatures). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what your signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone else. In the same way, your private key writes your digital signature and your public key allows people to verify whether data was signed by you, or by someone else. This process works as follows:

1 2 3 4 Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that the message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public key pair

(one public key and one private key). Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him or not. Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny. Jenny receives the message and uses Tims public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is from Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can have altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tims private key). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 155 Chapter 16 Certificates 5 Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jennys public key to verify the message. The Zyxel Device uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authoritys public key to verify the certificates. A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The Zyxel Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked. Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL

(Certificate Revocation List). The Zyxel Device can check a peers certificate against a directory servers list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure). Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits. need to transmit private keys. Self-signed Certificates Factory Default Certificate The Zyxel Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate. Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never You can have the Zyxel Device act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates. The Zyxel Device generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This certificate is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate. Certificate File Formats Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The Zyxel Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 156 Chapter 16 Certificates Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The files password is not connected to your certificates public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the Zyxel Device. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. 16.1.3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted certificate into the Zyxel Device, you should verify that you have the correct certificate. You can do this using the certificates fingerprint. A certificates fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes how to check a certificates fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate. 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer. 2 Make sure that the certificate has a .cer or .crt file name extension. 3 Double-click the certificates icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may vary based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 157 Chapter 16 Certificates 16.2 My Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates to open this screen. This is the Zyxel Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 94 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates Add Edit Remove

Name Type The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage Space in Use This bar displays the percentage of the Zyxel Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. Click this to go to the screen where you can have the Zyxel Device generate a certificate or a certification request. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. The Zyxel Device keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. Object Reference You cannot delete certificates that any of the Zyxel Devices features are configured to use. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays what kind of certificate this is. REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request. SELF represents a self-signed certificate. CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority. Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 158 Chapter 16 Certificates Table 68 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates (continued) DESCRIPTION This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. Click Import to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the Zyxel Device. Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates. LABEL Issuer Valid To Import Refresh 16.2.1 Add My Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Add icon to open the Add My Certificates screen. Use this screen to have the Zyxel Device create a self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request. Figure 95 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 159 Chapter 16 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add DESCRIPTION LABEL Name Subject Information Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and

;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a Host IP Address, Host Domain Name, or E-Mail. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Select a radio button to identify the certificates owner by IP address, domain name or e-

mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and periods. An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore. Organizational Unit Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. State (Province) Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Organization Town (City) Country Key Type Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. The Zyxel Device uses the RSA (Rivest, Shamir and Adleman) public-key encryption algorithm. SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) and SHA2 are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. SHA2-256 or SHA2-512 are part of the SHA2 set of cryptographic functions and they are considered even more secure than SHA1. Select a key type from RSA-SHA256 and RSA-SHA512. Key Length Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should use (1024 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space. Extended Key Usage Select Server Authentication to allow a web server to send clients the certificate to authenticate itself. Select Client Authentication to use the certificates key to authenticate clients to the secure gateway. These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated. Create a self-signed certificate Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates. Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My Certificate Edit screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority. Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Edit screen and then send it to the certification authority. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 160 Chapter 16 Certificates Table 69 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate a request for a certificate and apply to a certification authority for a certificate. You must have the certification authoritys certificate already imported in the Trusted Certificates screen. When you select this option, you must select the certification authoritys enrollment protocol and the certification authoritys certificate from the drop-down list boxes and enter the certification authoritys server address. You also need to fill in the Reference Number and Key if the certification authority requires them. Enrollment Protocol This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online. Select the certification authoritys enrollment protocol from the drop-

down list box. Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by VeriSign and Cisco. Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by the Public Key Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510. CA Server Address This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online. Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification authority server. For a URL, you can use up to 511 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9'()+,/:.=?;!*#@$_%-

CA Certificate This field applies when you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online. Select the certification authoritys certificate from the CA Certificate drop-down list box. You must have the certification authoritys certificate already imported in the Trusted Certificates screen. Click Trusted CAs to go to the Trusted Certificates screen where you can view (and manage) the Zyxel Device's list of certificates of trusted certification authorities. Request Authentication When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online, the certification authority may want you to include a reference number and key to identify you when you send a certification request. Fill in both the Reference Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses the CMP enrollment protocol. Just the Key field displays if your certification authority uses the SCEP enrollment protocol. For the reference number, use 0 to 99999999. For the key, use up to 31 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9;|`~!@#$%^&*()_+\{}':,./

OK Cancel Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. If you configured the Add My Certificates screen to have the Zyxel Device enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the Add My Certificates screen. Click Return and check your information in the Add My Certificates screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the Zyxel Device to enroll a certificate online. 16.2.2 Edit My Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Edit icon to open the My Certificate Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificates name. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 161 Chapter 16 Certificates Figure 96 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 162 Chapter 16 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. Certification Path This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request. Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself). If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The Zyxel Device does not trust the certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Click Refresh to display the certification path. These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. Refresh Certificate Information Type Version This field displays the X.509 version number. Serial Number This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the Zyxel Device. Subject Issuer This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field. none displays for a certification request. Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. none displays for a certification request. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. none displays for a certification request. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair

(the Zyxel Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). Subject Alternative Name This field displays the certificate owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. Extended Key Usage This field displays for what EKU (Extended Key Usage) functions the certificates key can be used. Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This field does not display for a certification request. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 163 Chapter 16 Certificates Table 70 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificates message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. This is the certificates message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded Format This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authoritys web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment. You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Export Certificate Only Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Password If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it here. Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you import the certificate to another device. Export Certificate with Private Key Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the certificates password and click this button. Click Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. You can only change the name. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. 16.2.3 Import Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import to open the My Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the Zyxel Device. Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the Zyxel Device. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificates public and private keys. The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen. You must remove any spaces in the certificates filename before you can import it. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 164 Chapter 16 Certificates Figure 97 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the Zyxel Device. Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Password This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the files password that was created when the PKCS #12 file was exported. OK Click OK to save the certificate on the Zyxel Device. Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. 16.3 Trusted Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates to open the Trusted Certificates screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the Zyxel Device to accept as trusted. The Zyxel Device also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certificates. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 165 Chapter 16 Certificates Figure 98 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage Space in Use This bar displays the percentage of the Zyxel Devices PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. The Zyxel Device keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. Object Reference You cannot delete certificates that any of the Zyxel Devices features are configured to use. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the Zyxel Device. Refresh Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates. Edit Remove

Name Subject Issuer Valid To Import 16.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates and then a certificates Edit icon to open the Trusted Certificates Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the Zyxel Device to check a NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 166 Chapter 16 Certificates certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. Figure 99 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 167 Chapter 16 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Name Certification Path This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entitys certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entitys certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entitys own certificate). The Zyxel Device does not trust the end entitys certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path. Enable X.509v3 CRL Distribution Points and OCSP checking Select this check box to have the Zyxel Device check incoming certificates that are signed by this certificate against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or an OCSP server. You also need to configure the OSCP or LDAP server details. OCSP Server Select this check box if the directory server uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol). Password LDAP Server URL ID Port ID Certificate Information Type Type the protocol, IP address and pathname of the OCSP server. The Zyxel Device may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the OCSP server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server (usually a certification authority). Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the OCSP server

(usually a certification authority). Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of certificates and lists of revoked certificates. Address Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server. Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server port number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for LDAP. The Zyxel Device may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server

(usually a certification authority). Password Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL directory server (usually a certification authority). These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. Version This field displays the X.509 version number. Serial Number This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority. Subject Issuer This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field. Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 168 LABEL Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate Chapter 16 Certificates Table 73 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit (continued) DESCRIPTION This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair

(the Zyxel Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). Subject Alternative Name This field displays the certificates owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This is the certificates message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This is the certificates message digest that the Zyxel Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Export Certificate Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. You can only change the name. Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Certificates screen. 16.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import to open the Import Trusted Certificates screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certificate to the Zyxel Device. Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 169 Chapter 16 Certificates Figure 100 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the Zyxel Device. Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. OK Click OK to save the certificate on the Zyxel Device. Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the previous screen. 16.4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this chapter. OCSP OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) allows an application or device to check whether a certificate is valid. With OCSP the Zyxel Device checks the status of individual certificates instead of downloading a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). OCSP has two main advantages over a CRL. The first is real-time status information. The second is a reduction in network traffic since the Zyxel Device only gets information on the certificates that it needs to verify, not a huge list. When the Zyxel Device requests certificate status information, the OCSP server returns a expired, current or unknown response. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 170 C H A P T E R 17 System 17.1 Overview Use the system screens to configure general Zyxel Device settings. 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Host Name screen (Section 17.2 on page 171) configures a unique name for the Zyxel Device in your network. Device. The Power Mode screen (Section 17.3 on page 172) configures the Zyxel Devices power settings. The Date/Time screen (Section 17.4 on page 173) configures the date and time for the Zyxel Device. The WWW screens (Section 17.5 on page 176) configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to the Zyxel The SSH screen (Section 17.6 on page 184) configures SSH (Secure SHell) for securely accessing the Zyxel Devices command line interface. The Telnet screen (Section 17.7 on page 188) configures Telnet for accessing the Zyxel Devices command line interface. The FTP screen (Section 17.8 on page 189) specifies FTP server settings. You can upload and download the Zyxel Devices firmware and configuration files using FTP. Please also see Chapter 19 on page 206 for more information about firmware and configuration files. The SNMP screens (Section 17.9 on page 190) configure the Zyxel Devices SNMP settings, including profiles that define allowed SNMPv3 access. 17.2 Host Name A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Configuration > System

> Host Name to open this screen. Figure 101 Configuration > System > Host Name NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 171 Chapter 17 System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Configuration > System > Host Name LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name to identify your Zyxel Device device. This name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (_) and periods (.) are accepted. System Location Specify the name of the place where the Zyxel Device is located. You can enter up to 60 alphanumeric and '() ,:;?! +-*/= #$%@ characters. Spaces and underscores are allowed. The name should start with a letter. Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - are accepted. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 17.3 Power Mode Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Devices power settings. Click Configuration > System > Power Mode to open this screen. Figure 102 Configuration > System > Power Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Configuration > System > Power Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Force override the power mode to full power Select this check box if you are using a PoE injector that does not support PoE negotiation. Otherwise, the Zyxel Device cannot draw full power from the power sourcing equipment. Enable this power mode to improve the Zyxel Devices performance in this situation. Note: Ensure that the power sourcing equipment can supply enough power to the AP to avoid abnormal system reboots. Note: Only enable this if you are using a passive PoE injector that is not IEEE 802.3at/bt compliant but can still provide full power. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 172 Chapter 17 System 17.4 Date and Time For effective scheduling and logging, the Zyxel Device system time must be accurate. The Zyxel Device has a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server. To change your Zyxel Devices time based on your local time zone and date, click Configuration >

System > Date/Time. The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the Zyxel Devices time and date or have the Zyxel Device get the date and time from a time server. Figure 103 Configuration > System > Date/Time The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Configuration > System > Date/Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the present time of your Zyxel Device. Current Date This field displays the present date of your Zyxel Device. Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings manually, the Zyxel Device uses the new setting once you click Apply. New Time

(hh:mm:ss) This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 173 Chapter 17 System Table 77 Configuration > System > Date/Time (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date

(yyyy-mm-dd) This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the Zyxel Device get the time and date from the time server you specify below. The Zyxel Device requests time and date settings from the time server under the following circumstances. When the Zyxel Device starts up. When you click Apply or Sync. Now in this screen. 24-hour intervals after starting up. Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Sync. Now Click this button to have the Zyxel Device get the time and date from a time server (see the Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight saving settings). Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Enable Daylight Saving Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Offset Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends. Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments). For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 174 Chapter 17 System 17.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List When you turn on the Zyxel Device for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01 00:00:00. The Zyxel Device then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of Network Time Protocol (NTP) time servers. The Zyxel Device continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not specify a time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified. Table 78 Default Time Servers 0.pool.ntp.org 1.pool.ntp.org 2.pool.ntp.org When the Zyxel Device uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the Zyxel Device goes through the rest of the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP time servers have been tried. 17.4.2 Time Server Synchronization Click the Sync. Now button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the Time Server Address field. When the Loading message appears, you may have to wait up to one minute. Figure 104 Loading The Current Time and Current Date fields will display the appropriate settings if the synchronization is successful. If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the View Log screen. Try re-configuring the Date/Time screen. To manually set the Zyxel Device date and time:

1 Click System > Date/Time. 2 3 4 5 Select Manual under Time and Date Setup. Enter the Zyxel Devices time in the New Time field. Enter the Zyxel Devices date in the New Date field. Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list. daylight savings. 7 Click Apply. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 175 6 As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the Zyxel Device clock for Chapter 17 System To get the Zyxel Device date and time from a time server:

1 Click System > Date/Time. 2 3 4 Select Get from Time Server under Time and Date Setup. Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list. Under Time and Date Setup, enter a Time Server Address. 5 Click Apply. 17.5 WWW Overview The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the Zyxel Device coming in from the WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP, Telnet, and FTP management access are not secure. Figure 105 Secure and Insecure Service Access From the WAN 17.5.1 Service Access Limitations A service cannot be used to access the Zyxel Device when you have disabled that service in the corresponding screen. 17.5.2 System Timeout There is a lease timeout for administrators. The Zyxel Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. Each user is also forced to log in the Zyxel Device for authentication again when the reauthentication time expires. You can change the timeout settings in the User screens. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 176 Chapter 17 System 17.5.3 HTTPS You can set the Zyxel Device to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator sessions. HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed). It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 16 on page 155 for more information). HTTPS on the Zyxel Device is used so that you can securely access the Zyxel Device using the Web Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the Zyxel Device) must always authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Zyxel Device), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server requires it to do so (select Authenticate Client Certificates in the WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the Zyxel Device a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Zyxel Device. Please refer to the following figure. 1 2 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the Zyxel Devices web server. HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Zyxel Devices web server. Figure 106 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation Note: If you disable HTTP in the WWW screen, then the Zyxel Device blocks all HTTP connection attempts. 17.5.4 Configuring WWW Service Control Click Configuration > System > WWW to open the WWW screen. Use this screen to specify HTTP or HTTPS settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 177 Chapter 17 System Figure 107 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control DESCRIPTION LABEL HTTPS Enable Server Port HTTP Enable Server Port Apply Reset Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device Web Configurator using secure HTTPs connections. The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port to a different number on the Zyxel Device, for example 8443, then you must notify people who need to access the Zyxel Device Web Configurator to use https://Zyxel Device IP Address:8443 as the URL. Authenticate Client Certificates Select Authenticate Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate itself to the Zyxel Device by sending the Zyxel Device a certificate. To do that the SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on the Zyxel Device. Server Certificate Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Zyxel Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. Redirect HTTP to HTTPS To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP connection requests to the HTTPS server. Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device Web Configurator using HTTP connections. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service to access the Zyxel Device. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 17.5.5 HTTPS Example If you havent changed the default HTTPS port on the Zyxel Device, then in your browser enter https://

Zyxel Device IP Address/ as the web site address where Zyxel Device IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Zyxel Device you wish to access. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 178 Chapter 17 System 17.5.5.1 Google Chrome Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Zyxel Device HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in the following screen. Figure 108 Security Alert Dialog Box (Google Chrome) Select Advanced > Proceed to 192.168.1.2 (unsafe) to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen. 17.5.5.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Zyxel Device HTTPS server, a Warning screen appears as shown in the following screen. Click Learn More... if you want to verify more information about the certificate from the Zyxel Device. Click Advanced > Accept the Risk and Continue. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 179 Chapter 17 System Figure 109 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox) 17.5.5.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the Zyxel Devices HTTPS server certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:

The issuing certificate authority of the Zyxel Devices HTTPS server certificate is not one of the browsers trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the Zyxel Device's factory default certificate is the Zyxel Device itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate. For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate authoritys certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. Refer to Appendix A on page 249 for details. 17.5.5.4 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates The SSL client needs a certificate if Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the Zyxel Device. You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the Zyxel Device in order for the Authenticate Client Certificates to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details). Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the Zyxel Device (see the Zyxel Devices Trusted Certificates Web Configurator screen). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 180 Chapter 17 System Figure 110 Trusted Certificates The CA sends you a package containing the CAs trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s) and a password to install the personal certificate(s). 17.5.5.5 Installing a Personal Certificate You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it during the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a screen similar to the one shown next. 1 Click Next to begin the wizard. 2 The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File name text box. Click Browse if you wish to import a different certificate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 181 Chapter 17 System 3 Enter the password given to you by the CA. 4 Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Place all certificates in the following store and choose a different location. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 182 Chapter 17 System 5 Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process. 6 You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer. 17.5.5.6 Using a Certificate When Accessing the Zyxel Device To access the Zyxel Device via HTTPS:

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 183 Chapter 17 System 1 Enter https://Zyxel Device IP Address/ in your browsers web address field. 2 When Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the Zyxel Device, the following screen asks you to select a personal certificate to send to the Zyxel Device. This screen displays even if you only have a single certificate as in the example. 3 You next see the Web Configurator login screen. 17.6 SSH You can use SSH (Secure SHell) to securely access the Zyxel Devices command line interface. SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the following figure, computer B on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the Zyxel Device (A) for a management session. Figure 111 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 184 Chapter 17 System 17.6.1 How SSH Works The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts using SSH v1. Figure 112 How SSH v1 Works Example 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server. The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer. 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use. 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 185 Chapter 17 System 17.6.2 SSH Implementation on the Zyxel Device Your Zyxel Device supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption methods

(AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Zyxel Device for management using port 22 (by default). 17.6.3 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the Zyxel Device over SSH. 17.6.4 Configuring SSH Click Configuration > System > SSH to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your Zyxel Devices Secure Shell settings. Note: It is recommended that you disable Telnet and FTP when you configure SSH for secure connections. Figure 113 Configuration > System > SSH The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Configuration > System > SSH DESCRIPTION LABEL Enable Version 1 Server Port Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device CLI using this service. Note: The Zyxel Device uses only SSH version 2 protocol. Select the check box to have the Zyxel Device use both SSH version 1 and version 2 protocols. If you clear the check box, the Zyxel Device uses only SSH version 2 protocol. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the Zyxel Device for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 186 Chapter 17 System 17.6.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the Zyxel Device. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program users guide. 17.6.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows This section describes how to access the Zyxel Device using the Secure Shell Client program. 1 Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the Zyxel Device. 2 Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 2. 3 A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Yes to continue. Figure 114 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key Enter the password to log in to the Zyxel Device. The CLI screen displays next. 17.6.5.2 Example 2: Linux This section describes how to access the Zyxel Device using the OpenSSH client program that comes with most Linux distributions. 1 Test whether the SSH service is available on the Zyxel Device. Enter telnet 192.168.1.2 22 at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer attempts to connect to port 22 on the Zyxel Device (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.2). A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 187 Chapter 17 System Figure 115 SSH Example 2: Test

$ telnet 192.168.1.2 22 Trying 192.168.1.2... Connected to 192.168.1.2. Escape character is '^]'. SSH-1.5-1.0.0 2 Enter ssh 2 192.168.1.2. This command forces your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the Zyxel Device using SSH, a message displays prompting you to save the host information of the Zyxel Device. Type yes and press [ENTER]. Then enter the password to log in to the Zyxel Device. Figure 116 SSH Example 2: Log in

$ ssh 2 192.168.1.2 The authenticity of host '192.168.1.2 (192.168.1.2)' can't be established. RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1. Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.2' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts. Administrator@192.168.1.2's password:

3 The CLI screen displays next. 17.7 Telnet You can use Telnet to access the Zyxel Devices command line interface. Click Configuration > System >

TELNET to configure your Zyxel Device for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to enable or disable Telnet and set the server port number. Figure 117 Configuration > System > TELNET The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Configuration > System > TELNET DESCRIPTION LABEL Enable Server Port Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device CLI using this service. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 188 Chapter 17 System Table 81 Configuration > System > TELNET (continued) DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. LABEL Apply Reset 17.8 FTP You can upload and download the Zyxel Devices firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. See Chapter 19 on page 206 for more information about firmware and configuration files. To change your Zyxel Devices FTP settings, click Configuration > System > FTP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify FTP settings. Figure 118 Configuration > System > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Configuration > System > FTP DESCRIPTION LABEL Enable Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the Zyxel Device using this service. TLS required Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt communication. This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers. Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Server Certificate Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the Zyxel Device for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 189 Chapter 17 System 17.9 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your Zyxel Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through the network. The Zyxel Device supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1), version two (SNMPv2c), and version three (SNMPv3). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Figure 119 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Zyxel Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 190 Chapter 17 System Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. 17.9.1 Supported MIBs The Zyxel Device supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The Zyxel Device also supports private MIBs (ZYXEL-ES-CAPWAP.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-COMMON.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-ZyXELAPMgmt.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-

PROWLAN.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-RFMGMT.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-SMI.MIB, and ZYXEL-ES-WIRELESS.MIB) to collect information about CPU and memory usage and VPN total throughput. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. You can download the Zyxel Devices MIBs from www.zyxel.com. 17.9.2 SNMP Traps The Zyxel Device will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs. Table 83 SNMP Traps OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkDown linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down. 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up. authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-

authenticated hosts. 17.9.3 Configuring SNMP To change your Zyxel Devices SNMP settings, click Configuration > System > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings. You can also configure user profiles that define allowed SNMPv3 access. Figure 120 Configuration > System > SNMP NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 191 Chapter 17 System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 84 Configuration > System > SNMP DESCRIPTION LABEL Enable Server Port Trap Community Add Edit Remove Privacy Privilege Apply Reset Select the check box to allow or disallow users to access the Zyxel Device using SNMP. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests. Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Trap Wireless Event Select this to have the Zyxel Device send a trap to the SNMP manager when a wireless client is connected to or disconnected from the Zyxel Device. SNMPv2c Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv2c to access the Zyxel Device. Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is private and allows all requests. SNMPv3 Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv3 to access the Zyxel Device. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The Zyxel Device confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action.

This the index number of an SNMPv3 user profile. User Name This is the name of the user for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured. Authentication This field displays the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. This field displays the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. This field displays whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 17.9.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile This screen allows you to add or edit an SNMPv3 user profile. To access this screen, click the Configuration > System > SNMP screens Add button or select a SNMPv3 user profile from the list and click the Edit button. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 192 Chapter 17 System Figure 121 Configuration > System > SNMP > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Configuration > System > SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Select the user name of the user account for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured. Authentication Select the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. Select MD5 to require the SNMPv3 users password be encrypted by MD5 for authentication. Select SHA to require the SNMPv3 users password be encrypted by SHA for authentication. Privacy Select the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. Select NONE to not encrypt the SNMPv3 communications. Select DES to use DES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications. Select AES to use AES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications. Privilege OK Cancel Select whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to the Zyxel Device using this SNMPv3 user profile. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 193 C H A P T E R 18 Log and Report 18.1 Overview Use the system screens to configure daily reporting and log settings. 18.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter The Email Daily Report screen (Section 18.2 on page 194) configures how and where to send daily reports and what reports to send. The Log Setting screens (Section 18.3 on page 196) specify which logs are e-mailed, where they are e-

mailed, and how often they are e-mailed. 18.2 Email Daily Report Use this screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing through your Zyxel Device. Note: Data collection may decrease the Zyxel Devices traffic throughput rate. Click Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report to display the following screen. Configure this screen to have the Zyxel Device e-mail you system statistics every day. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 194 Chapter 18 Log and Report Figure 122 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 86 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Email Daily Report Select this to send reports by e-mail every day. Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 195 Chapter 18 Log and Report Table 86 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL SSL/TLS Encryption Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want encrypted communications between the mail server and the Zyxel Device. Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS. Select No to not encrypt the communications. Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic. Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the Zyxel Devices system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the Zyxel Devices system date and time to the subject. Mail From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies. Mail To Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. Password This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. Click this button to have the Zyxel Device send the daily e-mail report immediately. Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation. Select the information to include in the report. Select Reset counters after sending report successfully if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period. Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. SMTP Authentication User Name Send Report Now Time for sending report Report Items Reset All Counters Apply Reset 18.3 Log Setting These screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing (for example, in the Monitor > View Log screen) or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is e-mailed immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as system errors and attacks. The Zyxel Device provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. The system log is available on the View Log screen, the e-mail profiles are used to mail log messages to the specified destinations, and the other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers. The Log Setting tab also controls what information is saved in each log. For the system log, you can also specify which log messages are e-mailed, where they are e-mailed, and how often they are e-mailed. For alerts, the Log Setting screen controls which events generate alerts and where alerts are e-mailed. The Log Setting screen provides a summary of all the settings. You can use the Edit Log Setting screen to maintain the detailed settings (such as log categories, e-mail addresses, server names, etc.) for any log. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 196 Chapter 18 Log and Report Alternatively, if you want to edit what events is included in each log, you can also use the Active Log Summary screen to edit this information for all logs at the same time. 18.3.1 Log Setting Screen To access this screen, click Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting. Figure 123 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 87 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting DESCRIPTION LABEL Edit

Status Name Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. Activate To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. Inactivate To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log. This field shows whether the log is active or not. This field displays the name of the log (system log or one of the remote servers). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 197 Chapter 18 Log and Report Table 87 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Format This field displays the format of the log. Internal - system log; you can view the log on the View Log tab. VRPT/Syslog - Zyxels Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format. Summary This field is a summary of the settings for each log. Click this button to open the Active Log Summary screen. Active Log Summary Apply Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take effect. 18.3.2 Edit System Log Settings This screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail profiles). Select a system log entry in the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 198 Chapter 18 Log and Report Figure 124 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 199 Chapter 18 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 88 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION E-Mail Server 1/2 Active Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and what kinds of log messages are included in alerts in the Active Log and Alert section. Mail Server Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server. SSL/TLS Encryption Select SSL/TLS to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want encrypted communications between the mail server and the Zyxel Device. Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS. Select No to not encrypt the communications. Mail Server Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic. Mail Subject Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Append system name to add the Zyxel Devices system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the Zyxel Devices system date and time to the subject. Send From Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies. Send Log To Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. Send Alerts To Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered. Sending Log Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: When Full, Hourly and When Full, Daily and When Full, and Weekly and When Full. Day for Sending Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log is e-

mailed. Time for Sending Log This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation. SMTP Authentication Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server. User Name Password Active Log and Alert This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the Zyxel Device will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 200 Chapter 18 Log and Report Table 88 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1. E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2.

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:

disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected. Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. E-mail Server 1 E-mail Server 2 Log Consolidation Active Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log messages that arrive within the specified Log Consolidation Interval. In the View Log tab, the text [count=x], where x is the number of original log messages, is appended at the end of the Message field, when multiple log messages were aggregated. Log Consolidation Interval Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text [count=x], where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of the Message field. OK Cancel Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 201 Chapter 18 Log and Report 18.3.3 Edit Remote Server This screen controls the settings for each log in the remote server (syslog). Select a remote server entry in the Log Setting screen and click the Edit icon. Figure 125 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 202 Chapter 18 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 89 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Settings for Remote Server Active Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Active Log section. Log Format This field displays the format of the log information. It is read-only. VRPT/Syslog - Zyxels Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format. Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log information. Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information. Server Address Log Facility Active Log Selection Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. Selection Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are:

disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category OK Cancel Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes. 18.3.4 Active Log Summary This screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, e-mail profiles, and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for example, where and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this screen, go to the Log Setting screen, and click the Active Log Summary button. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 203 Chapter 18 Log and Report Figure 126 Active Log Summary This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included in each log and each alert. (The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Log Summary If the Zyxel Device is set to controller mode, the AC section controls logs generated by the controller and the AP section controls logs generated by the managed APs. System log Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the Zyxel Device will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 204 Chapter 18 Log and Report Table 90 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1. E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2. Remote Server 1~4 For each remote server, use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.

This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. Log Category This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. System log Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:

disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green checkmark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected. E-mail Server 1 E-

mail E-mail Server 2 E-

mail Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-

mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The Zyxel Device does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. Remote Server 1~4 Syslog For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Category

(except All Logs; see below). Choices are:

disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category OK Cancel Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 205 C H A P T E R 19 File Manager 19.1 Overview Configuration files define the Zyxel Devices settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can store on the Zyxel Device and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a shell script without the Zyxel Device restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell script files on the Zyxel Device. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and upload them to the Zyxel Device. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh extension. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Configuration File screen (Section 19.2 on page 207) stores and names configuration files. You can also download and upload configuration files. The Firmware Package screen (Section 19.3 on page 212) checks your current firmware version and uploads firmware to the Zyxel Device. The Shell Script screen (Section 19.4 on page 214) stores, names, downloads, uploads and runs shell script files. 19.1.2 What you Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Configuration Files and Shell Scripts When you apply a configuration file, the Zyxel Device uses the factory default settings for any features that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the Zyxel Device only applies the commands that it contains. Other settings do not change. These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands manually. An example is shown below. Figure 127 Configuration File / Shell Script: Example

# enter configuration mode configure terminal

# change administrator password username admin password 4321 user-type admin

#configure default radio profile, change 2GHz channel to 11 & Tx output power # to 50%

wlan-radio-profile default 2g-channel 11 output-power 50%

exit write NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 206 Chapter 19 File Manager While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the Zyxel Device applies configuration files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below. Table 91 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the Zyxel Device Shell Scripts (.zysh) Configuration Files (.conf) Resets to default configuration. Goes into CLI Configuration mode. Runs the commands in the configuration file. Goes into CLI Privilege mode. Runs the commands in the shell script. You have to run the aforementioned example as a shell script because the first command is run in Privilege mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration file because the rest of the commands are executed in Configuration mode. Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts In a configuration file or shell script, use # or ! as the first character of a command line to have the Zyxel Device treat the line as a comment. Your configuration files or shell scripts can use exit or a command line consisting of a single ! to have the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode. Note: exit or !' must follow sub commands if it is to make the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode. In the following example lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 7 exits sub command mode.

! this is from Joe

# on 2010/12/05 wlan-ssid-profile default ssid Joe-AP qos wmm security default

Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the Zyxel Device processes the file line-by-line. The Zyxel Device checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it continues with the next line. If the Zyxel Device finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file or shell script and generates a log. You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-on-error off in the configuration file or shell script. The Zyxel Device ignores any errors in the configuration file or shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The Zyxel Device still generates a log for any errors. 19.2 Configuration File Click Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File to open this screen. Use the Configuration File screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the Zyxel Device to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 207 Chapter 19 File Manager Once your Zyxel Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Configuration File Flow at Restart If there is not a startup-config.conf when you restart the Zyxel Device (whether through a management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the Zyxel Device uses the system-default.conf configuration file with the Zyxel Devices default settings. If there is a startup-config.conf, the Zyxel Device checks it for errors and applies it. If there are no errors, the Zyxel Device uses it and copies it to the lastgood.conf configuration file as a back up file. If there is an error, the Zyxel Device generates a log and copies the startup-config.conf configuration file to the startup-config-bad.conf configuration file and tries the existing lastgood.conf configuration file. If there isnt a lastgood.conf configuration file or it also has an error, the Zyxel Device applies the system-default.conf configuration file. You can change the way the startup-config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup stop-

on-error off command. The Zyxel Device ignores any errors in the startup-config.conf file and applies all of the valid commands. The Zyxel Device still generates a log for any errors. Figure 128 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File Do not turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in progress. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 208 Chapter 19 File Manager The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File LABEL Rename DESCRIPTION Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the Zyxel Device. You can only rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the lastgood.conf, system-

default.conf and startup-config.conf files. You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the Zyxel Device. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Remove Click a configuration files row to select it and click Remove to delete it from the Zyxel Device. You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the system-

default.conf, startup-config.conf and lastgood.conf files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click OK to delete the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the configuration file. Download Click a configuration files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the Zyxel Device. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 209 Chapter 19 File Manager Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Use this button to have the Zyxel Device use a specific configuration file. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Apply to have the Zyxel Device use that configuration file. The Zyxel Device does not have to restart in order to use a different configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system reconfigures. The following screen gives you options for what the Zyxel Device is to do if it encounters an error in the configuration file. Immediately stop applying the configuration file - this is not recommended because it would leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured before the first error, the console port may be the only way to access the Zyxel Device. Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration -

this gets the Zyxel Device started with a fully valid configuration file as quickly as possible. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration files errors. This lets the Zyxel Device apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for what to fix. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous configuration - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates error logs for all of the configuration files errors, and starts the Zyxel Device with a fully valid configuration file. Click OK to have the Zyxel Device start applying the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen

This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration files that you can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available flash storage space. File Name This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file. You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names. The system-default.conf file contains the Zyxel Devices default settings. Select this file and click Apply to reset all of the Zyxel Device settings to the factory defaults. This configuration file is included when you upload a firmware package. The startup-config.conf file is the configuration file that the Zyxel Device is currently using. If you make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied to this configuration file. The Zyxel Device applies configuration changes made in the Web Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration changes made via commands when you use the write command. The lastgood.conf is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when the Zyxel Device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can apply lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration. Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 210 Chapter 19 File Manager Table 92 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last changed or saved. Upload Configuration File The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Zyxel Device File Path Browse... You cannot upload a configuration file named system-default.conf or lastgood.conf. If you upload startup-config.conf, it will replace the current configuration and immediately apply the new settings. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a

.conf filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a fie of a different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. 19.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP The following example gets a configuration file named startup-config.conf from the Zyxel Device and saves it on the computer. 1 Connect your computer to the Zyxel Device. The FTP server IP address of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254. Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device. For example, in the Windows command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when the firmware recovery finishes. Enter your user name when prompted. Enter your password as requested. Use cd to change to the directory that contains the files you want to download. Use dir or ls if you need to display a list of the files in the directory. Use "get to download files. Transfer the configuration file on the Zyxel Device to your computer. Type get followed by the name of the configuration file. This examples uses get startup-config.conf. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 211 Chapter 19 File Manager C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2 Connected to 192.168.1.2. 220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ----------

220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed. 220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21. 220-This is a private system - No anonymous login 220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity. User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin 331 User admin OK. Password required Password:

230 OK. Current restricted directory is /

ftp> cd conf 250 OK. Current directory is /conf ftp> ls 200 PORT command successful 150 Connecting to port 5001 lastgood.conf startup-config.conf system-default.conf 226 3 matches total ftp: 57 bytes received in 0.33Seconds 0.17Kbytes/sec. ftp> get startup-config.conf 200 PORT command successful 150 Connecting to port 5002 226-File successfully transferred 226 0.002 seconds (measured here), 1.66 Mbytes per second ftp: 2928 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 183.00Kbytes/sec. ftp>

9 Wait for the file transfer to complete. 10 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. 19.3 Firmware Package Click Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package to open this screen. Use the Firmware Package screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the Zyxel Device. Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it. Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses a .bin extension. The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset the Zyxel Device while the firmware update is in progress!

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 212 Chapter 19 File Manager Figure 129 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 93 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package LABEL DESCRIPTION Boot Module This is the version of the boot module that is currently on the Zyxel Device. Current Version This is the firmware version and the date created. Released Date This is the date that the version of the firmware was created. File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Zyxel Device again. Note: The Zyxel Device automatically reboots after a successful upload. The Zyxel Device automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Dashboard screen. 19.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP This procedure requires the Zyxel Devices firmware. Download the firmware package from www.zyxel.com and unzip it. The firmware file uses a .bin extension, for example, "600ABFH0C0.bin". Do the following after you have obtained the firmware file. 1 Connect your computer to the Zyxel Device. 2 The FTP server IP address of the Zyxel Device in standalone mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your computer to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 213 Chapter 19 File Manager 3 4 5 6 7 8 Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the Zyxel Device. For example, in the Windows command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see when the firmware recovery finishes. Enter your user name when prompted. Enter your password as requested. Enter hash for FTP to print a `#' character for every 1024 bytes of data you upload so that you can watch the file transfer progress. Enter bin to set the transfer mode to binary. Transfer the firmware file from your computer to the Zyxel Device. Type put followed by the path and name of the firmware file. This examples uses put C:\ftproot\Zyxel Device_FW\600ABFH0C0.bin. C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2 Connected to 192.168.1.2. 220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ----------

220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed. 220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21. 220-This is a private system - No anonymous login 220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity. User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin 331 User admin OK. Password required Password:

230 OK. Current restricted directory is /

ftp> hash Hash mark printing On ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) . ftp> bin 200 TYPE is now 8-bit binary ftp> put C:\ftproot\Zyxel Device_FW\600ABFH0C0.bin 9 Wait for the file transfer to complete. 10 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt. 19.4 Shell Script Use shell script files to have the Zyxel Device use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create the shell script files. They must use a .zysh filename extension. Click Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the Zyxel Device at the same time. Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write command, the changes will be lost when the Zyxel Device restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 214 Chapter 19 File Manager Figure 131 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script Each field is described in the following table. Table 94 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script LABEL DESCRIPTION Rename Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device. You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the Zyxel Device. Click a shell scripts row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Remove Click a shell script files row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the Zyxel Device. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file. Download Click a shell script files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Apply Use this button to have the Zyxel Device use a specific shell script file. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Apply to have the Zyxel Device use that shell script file. You may need to wait awhile for the Zyxel Device to finish applying the commands.

This column displays the number for each shell script file entry. File Name This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file. Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file. Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or saved. Upload Shell Script The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from your computer to your Zyxel Device. File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 215 Chapter 19 File Manager Table 94 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse... Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 216 C H A P T E R 20 Diagnostics 20.1 Overview Use the diagnostics screen for troubleshooting. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Diagnostics screen (Section 20.2 on page 217) generates a file containing the Zyxel Devices configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during troubleshooting. 20.2 Diagnostics This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the Zyxel Devices configuration and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer support during troubleshooting. All categories of settings and shell script files stored on the Zyxel Device will be included in the diagnostic file. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostics screen. Click Collect Now to have the Zyxel Device create a new diagnostic file. Figure 132 Maintenance > Diagnostics The Debug Information Center screen then displays showing whether the collection is in progress, was successful, or has failed. When the data collection is done, click Download to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 217 Chapter 20 Diagnostics Figure 133 Maintenance > Diagnostics: Debug Information Collector NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 218 C H A P T E R 21 LEDs 21.1 Overview The LEDs of your Zyxel Device can be controlled such that they stay lit (ON) or OFF after the Zyxel Device is ready. There are two features that control the LEDs of your Zyxel Device - Locator and Suppression (see Section 1.4 on page 19). 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Suppression screen (Section 21.2 on page 219) allows you to set how you want the LEDs to behave after the Zyxel Device is ready. The Locator screen (Section 21.3 on page 220) allows users to see the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. 21.2 Suppression Screen The LED Suppression feature allows you to control how the LEDs of your Zyxel Device behave after its ready. The default LED suppression setting of your AP is different depending on your Zyxel Device model. You can go to the Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression screen to see the default LED behavior and change the LED suppression setting. After you make changes in the suppression screen, it will be stored as the default when the Zyxel Device is restarted. See (Section 3.2 on page 34) for information on default values for different models. Note: When the Zyxel Device is booting or performing firmware upgrade, the LEDs will light up regardless of the setting in LED suppression. To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 219 Chapter 21 LEDs Figure 134 Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression The following table describes fields in the above screen. Table 95 Maintenance > LED > Suppression LABEL DESCRIPTION Suppression On If the Suppression On check box is checked, the LEDs of your Zyxel Device will turn off after its ready. If the check box is unchecked, the LEDs will stay lit after the Zyxel Device is ready. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 21.3 Locator Screen The Locator feature identifies the location of your Zyxel Device among several devices in the network. You can run this feature and set a timer in this screen. To run the locator feature, enter a number of minutes and click Turn On button to have the Zyxel Device find its location. The Locator LED will start to blink for the number of minutes set in the Locator screen. The default setting is 10 minutes. While the locator is running, the turn on button will gray out and return after its finished. If you make changes to the time default setting, it will be stored as the default when the Zyxel Device restarts. Note: The Locator feature is not affected by the Suppression setting. To access this screen, click Maintenance > LEDs > Locator. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 220 Chapter 21 LEDs Figure 135 Maintenance > LEDs > Locator The following table describes fields in the above screen. Table 96 Maintenance > LED > Locator DESCRIPTION LABEL Turn On Turn Off Apply Refresh Click Turn On button to activate the locator. The Locator function will show the actual location of the Zyxel Device between several devices in the network. Otherwise, click Turn Off to disable the locator feature. Automatically Extinguish After Enter a time interval between 1 and 60 minutes to stop the locator LED from blinking. Default is 10 minutes. Click Apply to save changes in this screen. Click Refresh to update the information in this screen. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 221 C H A P T E R 22 Antenna Switch 22.1 Overview 22.1.1 What You Need To Know Use this screen to adjust coverage depending on the orientation of the antenna. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. On the Zyxel Device that comes with internal antennas and also has an antenna switch, you can adjust coverage depending on the antenna orientation for the Zyxel Device radios using the web configurator, the command line interface (CLI) or a physical switch. Check Section 1.4 on page 19 to see if your Zyxel Device has an antenna switch. Figure 136 WAC Physical Antenna Switch Note: With the physical antenna switch, you apply the same antenna orientation settings to both radios. You can set the radios to have different settings while using the web configurator or the command line interface. Note: The antenna switch in the web configurator has priority over the physical antenna switch after you Enable Software Control in the Maintenance > Antenna screen. By default, software control is disabled. 22.2 Antenna Switch Screen To access this screen, click Maintenance > Antenna. The screen varies depending on whether the Zyxel Device has a physical antenna switch or allows you to change antenna orientation settings on a per-radio basis or on a per-AP basis. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 222 Chapter 22 Antenna Switch Figure 137 Maintenance > Antenna > Antenna Switch (Per Radio) Figure 138 Maintenance > Antenna > Antenna Switch (Per AP) If the Zyxel Device has a physical antenna switch, select the Enable Software Control option to use the Web configurator to adjust coverage depending on each radios antenna orientation for better coverage. Select Wall if you mount the Zyxel Device to a wall. Select Ceiling if the Zyxel Device is mounted on a ceiling. You can switch from Wall to Ceiling if there are still wireless dead zones, and vice versa. Click Apply to save your changes or click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 223 C H A P T E R 23 Reboot 23.1 Overview Use this screen to restart the Zyxel Device. 23.1.1 What You Need To Know If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot. Reboot is different to reset; reset returns the Zyxel Device to its default configuration. 23.2 Reboot This screen allows remote users can restart the Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Maintenance >

Reboot. Figure 139 Maintenance > Reboot Click the Reboot button to restart the Zyxel Device. Wait a few minutes until the login screen appears. If the login screen does not appear, type the IP address of the Zyxel Device in your Web browser. You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 224 C H A P T E R 24 Shutdown 24.1 Overview Use this screen to shut down the Zyxel Device. Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown command before you turn off the Zyxel Device or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt. 24.1.1 What You Need To Know Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Shutdown is different to reset; reset returns the Zyxel Device to its default configuration. 24.2 Shutdown To access this screen, click Maintenance > Shutdown. Figure 140 Maintenance > Shutdown Click the Shutdown button to shut down the Zyxel Device. Wait for the Zyxel Device to shut down before you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power. You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shut down the Zyxel Device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 225 PART II Local Configuration in Cloud Mode 226 C H A P T E R 25 Cloud Mode 25.1 Overview The Zyxel Device is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula Control Center) when it is connected to the Internet and has been registered in the NCC. If you need to change the Zyxel Devices VLAN setting or manually set its IP address, access its simplified web configurator (see Chapter 4 on page 53). You can check the NCC's Access Point > Monitor > Access Points screen or the connected gateway for the Zyxel Device's current LAN IP address. Alternatively, disconnect the gateway or disable its DHCP server function and use the Zyxel Device's default static LAN IP address

(192.168.1.2). 25.2 Cloud Mode Web Configurator Screens When your Zyxel Device is managed through NCC, you can access only the following screens through the Web Configurator:

Dashboard Configuration > Network > IP Setting Configuration > Network > VLAN Maintenance > Shell Script Maintenance > Diagnostics NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 227 Chapter 25 Cloud Mode Maintenance > Log These screens also have fewer options than those in standalone Zyxel Devices. The rest of the Zyxel Devices features must be configured through the NCC. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 228 C H A P T E R 26 Dashboard This screen displays general AP information, and client information in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets. Figure 141 Dashboard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 97 Dashboard LABEL DESCRIPTION AP Information MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the Zyxel Device. Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the Zyxel Device. Product Model This field displays the model name of the Zyxel Device. 2.4G Channel Information This field displays the channel number the Zyxel Device is using and its output power in the 2.4 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled. 5G Channel Information This field displays the channel number the Zyxel Device is using and its output power in the 5 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled. Ethernet This field displays whether the Zyxel Devices Ethernet port is connected and the IP address of the gateway to which the Zyxel Device is connected. Internet This field displays whether the Zyxel Device is connecting to the Internet. Nebula Connectivity Status This field displays whether the Zyxel Device can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control Center

(NCC). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 229 Chapter 26 Dashboard Table 97 Dashboard (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Nebula Control Center Activation Status This field displays whether the Zyxel Device has been registered and can be managed by the NCC. Use Proxy to Access NCC This displays whether the NAP uses a proxy server to access the NCC (Nebula Control Center). If the Zyxel Device cannot connect to the Internet or to NCC, an error message is shown on this screen, as in the following. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 230 C H A P T E R 27 Network 27.1 Overview This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your Zyxel Device in cloud mode. See Section 9.1 on page 94 for information about IP addresses. Note: Make sure your VLAN settings allow the Zyxel Device to connect to the Internet so you could manage it with NCC. 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The IP Setting screen (Section 27.2 on page 231) configures the Zyxel Devices LAN IP address. The VLAN screen (Section 27.3 on page 233) configures the Zyxel Devices VLAN settings. 27.2 IP Setting Use this screen to configure the IP address for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > IP Setting. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 231 Chapter 27 Network Figure 142 Configuration > Network > IP Setting Each field is described in the following table. Table 98 Configuration > Network > IP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Assignment Use Fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Get Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The Zyxel Device sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. DNS Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server. Use Proxy to Access Internet If the Zyxel Device is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure the proxy server settings so that the Zyxel Device can access the NCC through the proxy server. Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy Port Enter service port number used by the proxy server. Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to the Internet. User Name Enter your proxy user name. Password Enter your proxy password. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 232 Chapter 27 Network 27.3 VLAN This section discusses how to configure the Zyxel Devices VLAN settings. See Section 9.3 on page 98 for more information about VLAN. Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > VLAN. Figure 143 Configuration > Network > VLAN Each field is described in the following table. Table 99 Configuration > Network > VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Settings Management VLAN ID Untagged/

Tagged Enter a VLAN ID for the Zyxel Device. Set whether the Zyxel Device adds the VLAN ID to outbound traffic transmitted through its Ethernet port. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 233 C H A P T E R 28 Maintenance 28.1 Overview When the Zyxel Device is set to work in cloud mode, the Maintenance screens let you mange shell script files on the Zyxel Device, generate a diagnostic file, or view log messages. See Chapter 19 on page 206 for information about shell scripts. 28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Shell Script screen (Section 28.2 on page 234) stores, names, downloads, and uploads shell script files. The Diagnostics screen (Section 28.3 on page 235) generates a file containing the Zyxel Devices configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during troubleshooting. The Log > View Log screen (Section 28.4 on page 236) displays the Zyxel Devices current log messages when it is disconnected from the NCC. 28.2 Shell Script Use shell script files to have the Zyxel Device use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create the shell script files. They must use a .zysh filename extension. Click Maintenance > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name, download, and upload shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the Zyxel Device at the same time. Figure 144 Maintenance > Shell Script NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 234 Chapter 28 Maintenance Each field is described in the following table. Table 100 Maintenance > Shell Script LABEL DESCRIPTION Rename Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device. You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the Zyxel Device. Click a shell scripts row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Remove Click a shell script files row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the Zyxel Device. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file. Download Click a shell script files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Copy Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the Zyxel Device. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-

9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file.

This column displays the number for each shell script file entry. File Name This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file. Size This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file. Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or saved. Upload Shell Script The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from your computer to your Zyxel Device. File Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Browse... Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload. Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes. 28.3 Diagnostics This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the Zyxel Devices configuration and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer support during troubleshooting. All categories of settings and shell script files stored on the Zyxel Device will be included in the diagnostic file. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostics screen. Click Collect Now to have the Zyxel Device create a new diagnostic file. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 235 Chapter 28 Maintenance Figure 145 Maintenance > Diagnostics The Debug Information Center screen then displays showing whether the collection is in progress, was successful, or has failed. When the data collection is done, click Download to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer. Figure 146 Maintenance > Diagnostics: Debug Information Collector 28.4 View Log The NCC periodically gathers log files from the devices being managed by it. Before the NCC pulls logs from the Zyxel Device or when the Zyxel Device is disconnected from the NCC, you can use this screen to view its current log messages. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Log. Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first. Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 236 Chapter 28 Maintenance Figure 147 Maintenance > Log > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 101 Maintenance > Log > View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Filter / Hide Filter Click this button to show or hide the filter settings. Display Priority If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are available. If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available. Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one time, or you can view the Debug Log. This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: any, emerg, alert, crit, error, warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the Category is Debug Log. Source Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter. Destination Address This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter. Source Interface This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that generated the log message. Destination Interface Protocol Keyword This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message. This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would like to see. This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the Message, Source, Destination and Note fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. You can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as punctuation marks

() ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are not allowed. Search This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 237 Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 101 Maintenance > Log > View Log (continued) DESCRIPTION Click this to update the list of logs. LABEL Refresh

Time Priority Category Message Source Destination Destination Interface Protocol Note Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message. This field displays the time the log message was recorded. This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority field above. This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the Display and (other) Category fields. This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text [count=x], where x is a number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple entries were aggregated to generate into this one. This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the log message. Source Interface This field displays the source interface of the packet that generated the log message. This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated the log message. This field displays the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message. This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message. This field displays any additional information about the log message. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 238 PART III Appendices and Troubleshooting 239 C H A P T E R 29 Troubleshooting 29.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LED Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login Internet Access WiFi Network Resetting the Zyxel Device 29.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED The Zyxel Device does not turn on. The LED is not on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adapter included with the Zyxel Device or a PoE power injector/

switch. 4 5 2 Make sure the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch is connected to the Zyxel Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. If none of these steps work, you may have faulty hardware and should contact your Zyxel Device vendor. The LED does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.2 on page 34. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 240 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector to the Zyxel Device. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 29.3 Zyxel Device Management, Access, and Login I forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device. 1 2 3 4 The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.6 on page 247. If your Zyxel Device is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. If the NCC has managed the Zyxel Device, you can also check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access Point screen for the Zyxel Device's current LAN IP address. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address (in standalone mode) is 192.168.1.2. If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 3.2 on page 34. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Zyxel Device. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Zyxel Device, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the Zyxel Device. 5 Reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Zyxel Device with the default IP address. See Section 29.6 on page 247. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 241 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Zyxel Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Zyxel Device, check the remote management settings to find out why the Zyxel Device does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. I forgot the password. 1 2 2 4 The default password is 1234. If the Zyxel Device is connected to the NCC and registered, check the NCC for the password. If this does not work, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.6 on page 247. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Zyxel Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default password is 1234. This fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Zyxel Device. Log out of the Zyxel Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector to the Zyxel Device. If this does not work, you have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. See Section 29.6 on page 247. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot access the Zyxel Device directly anymore after switching to NCC management. Check the Zyxel Device IP address and login credentials using the NCC and use them to access the Zyxel Device. Note that the built-in Web Configurator will have limited functionality when managed through NCC. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 242 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting I enabled NCC Discovery, but the Zyxel Device is still in standalone mode. Make sure your Zyxel Device is registered to the NCC. The Zyxel Device is already registered with NCC, but it is still in standalone mode; it cannot connect to the NCC. 1 Make sure that NCC Discovery is enabled (see Section 9.6 on page 103). 2 Check your networks firewall/security settings. Make sure the following TCP ports are allowed: 443, 4335, and 6667. 3 Make sure your Zyxel Device can access the Internet. 4 Check your networks VLAN settings (see Section 9.3 on page 98). You may have to change the Management VLAN settings of the Zyxel Device to allow it to connect to the Internet and access the NCC. Note: Changing the management VLAN and IP address settings on the Zyxel Device also pushes these changes to the NCC. Do this only if your device cannot otherwise connect to the NCC. 5 Make sure your Zyxel Device doesnt have to go through network authentication such as a captive portal, If your network uses a captive portal, the network administrator may have to create a new VLAN without this requirement. Change your Zyxel Devices management VLAN settings as necessary. I want to switch from NCC to AC management, but I couldnt find the AC Discovery menu in the Zyxel Device web configurator. 1 2 Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC. Reset your Zyxel Device to the factory defaults. 3 Make sure that your Zyxel Device is in the same subnet as the AC, and enable AC Discovery in Configuration > Network > AC Discovery. The Zyxel Device cannot discover the AC. 1 Make sure your Zyxel Device is not registered to NCC. 2 Enable AC Discovery in Configuration > Network > AC Discovery. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 243 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 3 Make sure that the Zyxel Device and the AC are both in the same subnet. 4 If you have to set them up in different subnets, see AC management and IP Subnets on page 96. I accidentally pressed the Nebula button in the NXCs web configurator. How do I undo it?

If the Zyxel Device is not registered with the NCC, register it first. 1 2 3 Unregister the Zyxel Device from the NCC. Reset the Zyxel Device to the factory defaults. Some features I set using the NCC do not work as expected. 1 Make sure your Zyxel Device can access the Internet. 2 Check your networks firewall/security settings. Make sure the following ports are allowed:

3 After changing your Zyxel Device settings using the NCC, wait 1-2 minutes for the changes to take TCP: 443, 4335, and 6667 UDP: 123 effect. I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing. When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages (see Section 1.4 on page 19), new log messages automatically overwrite the oldest log messages. The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly. In a configuration file or shell script, use # or ! as the first character of a command line to have the Zyxel Device treat the line as a comment. Your configuration files or shell scripts can use exit or a command line consisting of a single ! to have the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode. Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the Zyxel Device restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script. Note: exit or !' must follow sub commands if it is to make the Zyxel Device exit sub command mode. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 244 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting I cannot upload the firmware uploaded using FTP. The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware in standalone mode. For managed Zyxel Devices, using the NCC or AC is recommended. You only need to use FTP if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it. 29.4 Internet Access Clients cannot access the Internet through the Zyxel Device. 1 Check the Zyxel Devices hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected

(refer to Section 3.2 on page 34). See the Quick Start Guide and Section 29.2 on page 240. 2 Make sure the Zyxel Device is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address. If clients are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings on the wireless clients are the same as the settings on the Zyxel Device. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your Zyxel Device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. Reboot the client and reconnect to the Zyxel Device. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 3 5 6 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 3.2 on page 34. If the Zyxel Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength using the NCC, AC, Zyxel Device Web Configurator, or the client device itself. If the signal is weak, try moving the client closer to the Zyxel Device (if possible), and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Reboot the Zyxel Device using the web configurator/CLI or the NCC or AC. 4 Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, activate it. When enabled, raise or lower the priority for some applications. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 245 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor. 29.5 WiFi Network I cannot access the Zyxel Device or ping any computer from the WLAN. 1 Make sure the wireless LAN (wireless radio) is enabled on the Zyxel Device. 2 Make sure the radio or at least one of the Zyxel Devices radios is operating in AP mode. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is working properly. 4 Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the Zyxel Devices active radio. 5 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the Zyxel 6 Check that both the Zyxel Device and your computer are using the same wireless and wireless security Device. settings. Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN. WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2-PSK is recommended. The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified. If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. Change the RADIUS servers configuration if you need to use a different re-authentication timer setting. I cannot import a certificate into the Zyxel Device. 1 For My Certificates, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the Zyxel Device. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificates public and private keys. 2 You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 246 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting 3 Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The Zyxel Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The files password is not connected to your certificates public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the Zyxel Device. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. Wireless clients are not being load balanced among my Zyxel Devices. Make sure that all the Zyxel Devices used by the wireless clients in question share the same SSID, security, and radio settings. Make sure that all the Zyxel Devices are in the same broadcast domain. Make sure that the wireless clients are in range of the other Zyxel Devices; if they are only in range of a single Zyxel Device, then load balancing may not be as effective. In the Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List screen, there is no load balancing indicator associated with any Zyxel Devices assigned to the load balancing task. Check that the AP profile which contains the load balancing settings is correctly assigned to the Zyxel Devices in question. The load balancing task may have been terminated because further load balancing on the Zyxel Devices in question is no longer required. 29.6 Resetting the Zyxel Device If you cannot access the Zyxel Device by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and then on again. If you still cannot access the Zyxel Device by any method or you forget the administrator password(s), you can reset the Zyxel Device to its factory-default settings. Any configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the Zyxel Device should still be available afterwards. Use the following procedure to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 247 Chapter 29 Troubleshooting Note: This procedure removes the current configuration. 1 Make sure the Power LED is on and not blinking. Press the RESET button and hold it until the Power LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about ten seconds.) Release the RESET button, and wait for the Zyxel Device to restart. You should be able to access the Zyxel Device in standalone mode using the default settings. 29.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions. 2 3 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 248 A P P E N D I X A Importing Certificates This appendix shows you how to import public key certificates into your web browser. Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate. When a certificate authority such as VeriSign, Comodo, or Network Solutions, to name a few, receives a certificate request from a website operator, they confirm that the web domain and contact information in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar. If they match, then the certificate is issued to the website operator, who then places it on the site to be issued to all visiting web browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate. Many Zyxel products, such as the Zyxel Device, issue their own public key certificates. These can be used by web browsers on a LAN or WAN to verify that they are in fact connecting to the legitimate device and not one masquerading as it. However, because the certificates were not issued by one of the several organizations officially recognized by the most common web browsers, you will need to import the Zyxel-created certificate into your web browser and flag that certificate as a trusted authority. Note: You can see if you are browsing on a secure website if the URL in your web browsers address bar begins with https:// or there is a sealed padlock icon (

in the main browser window (not all browsers show the padlock in the same location).

) somewhere Google Chrome The following example uses Google Chrome on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 249 Appendix A Importing Certificates Export a Certificate 1 If your devices Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then upon browsing with it for the first time, you are presented with a certification error. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 250 Appendix A Importing Certificates 2 Click Advanced > Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe). 3 In the Address Bar, click Not Secure > Certificate (Invalid). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 251 Appendix A Importing Certificates 4 In the Certificate dialog box, click Details > Copy to File. 5 In the Certificate Export Wizard, click Next. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 252 Appendix A Importing Certificates 6 Select the format and settings you want to use and then click Next. 7 Type a filename and specify a folder to save the certificate in. Click Next. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 253 Appendix A Importing Certificates 8 In the Completing the Certificate Export Wizard screen, click Finish. 9 Finally, click OK when presented with the successful certificate export message. Import a Certificate After storing the certificate in your computer (see Export a Certificate), you need to install it as a trusted root certification authority using the following steps:

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 254 Appendix A Importing Certificates 1 Open your web browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 255 Appendix A Importing Certificates 2 Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage certificates. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 256 Appendix A Importing Certificates 3 In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities. Click Import to start the Certificate Import Wizard. 4 Click Next when the wizard pops up, and then on the following screen click Browse. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 257 Appendix A Importing Certificates 5 Select the certificate file you want to import and click Open. 6 Click Next. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 258 Appendix A Importing Certificates 7 Confirm the settings displayed and click Finish. 8 If presented with a security warning, click Yes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 259 Appendix A Importing Certificates 9 Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import. Install a Stand-Alone Certificate File Rather than installing a public key certificate using web browser settings, you can install a stand-alone certificate file if one has been issued to you. 1 Double-click the public key certificate file. 2 Click Install Certificate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 260 Appendix A Importing Certificates 3 Click Next on the first wizard screen, click Place all certificates in the following store, and click Browse. 4 Select Trusted Root Certificate Authorities > OK, and then click Next. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 261 Appendix A Importing Certificates 5 Confirm the information shown on the final wizard screen and click Finish. 6 If presented with a security warning, click Yes. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 262 Appendix A Importing Certificates 7 Finally, click OK when you are notified of the successful import. Remove a Certificate in Google Chrome This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Google Chrome on Windows 7. 1 Open your web browser, click the menu icon, and click Settings. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 263 Appendix A Importing Certificates 2 Scroll down and click Advanced to expand the menu. Under Privacy and security, click Manage certificates. 3 In the Certificates pop-up screen, click Trusted Root Certification Authorities. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 264 Appendix A Importing Certificates 4 Select the certificate you want to remove and click Remove. 5 Click Yes when you see the following warning message. 6 Confirm the details displayed in the warning message and click Yes. Firefox The following example uses Mozilla Firefox on Windows 7. You first have to store the certificate in your computer and then install it as a Trusted Root CA, as shown in the following tutorials. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 265 Appendix A Importing Certificates Export a Certificate 1 If your devices Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it you are presented with a certification error. Click Advanced. 2 Click View Certificate. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 266 Appendix A Importing Certificates 3 Click Details > Export. 4 Type a filename and click Save. Import a Certificate After storing the certificate in your computer, you need to import it in trusted root certification authorities using the following steps:

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 267 Appendix A Importing Certificates 1 Open Firefox and click Tools > Options. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 268 Appendix A Importing Certificates 2 In the Options page, click Privacy & Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View Certificates. 3 In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities > Import. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 269 Appendix A Importing Certificates 4 Use the Select File dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Open. 5 Select Trust this CA to identify websites and click OK. Removing a Certificate in Firefox This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Firefox. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 270 Appendix A Importing Certificates 1 Open Firefox and click Tools > Options. 2 In the Options page, click Privacy & Security, scroll to the bottom of the page, and then click View Certificates. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 271 Appendix A Importing Certificates 3 In the Certificate Manager, click Authorities and select the certificate you want to remove, Click Delete or Distrust. 4 In the following dialog box, click OK. 5 The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed, a certification error appears. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 272 A P P E N D I X B IPv6 Overview IPv6 Addressing IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-

local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 102 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 273 Appendix B IPv6 Unspecified Address Loopback Address Multicast Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 103 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 104 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 274 Appendix B IPv6 Subnet Masking Interface ID EUI-64 Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character

(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. Table 105 MAC Table 106 EUI-64 00

: 13

: 49

: 12

: 34

: 56 02

: 13

: 49

: FF

: FE

: 12

: 34

: 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address (beginning with fe80). When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Zyxel Device is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 1another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP address. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. 1. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 275 Appendix B IPv6 Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-

Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Zyxel Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast, the Zyxel Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 276 Appendix B IPv6 ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbors reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:

Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbors link-layer address (MAC address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message. Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address. Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters. IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list. The Zyxel Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages. In IPv6, the Zyxel Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the Zyxel Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Zyxel Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbors link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the Zyxel Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the routers information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The Zyxel Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router. When the Zyxel Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Zyxel Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Zyxel Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the Zyxel Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Zyxel Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages. Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 277 Appendix B IPv6 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 278 Appendix B IPv6 1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. 2 After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. 3 Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 279 Appendix B IPv6 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. 3 Click OK to save the change. 1 2 5 6 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address

(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 280 A P P E N D I X C Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the device. See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp. https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/

India Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/

Kazakhstan Zyxel Kazakhstan https://www.zyxel.kz NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 281 Appendix C Customer Support Korea Zyxel Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines Zyxel Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/

Vietnam Belarus Zyxel BY Belgium https://www.zyxel.by Zyxel Communications B.V. https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Europe NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 282 Appendix C Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria Zyxel https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/

Denmark Zyxel Communications A/S https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/

Estonia Zyxel Estonia https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/

France Zyxel France https://www.zyxel.fr Germany Zyxel Deutschland GmbH https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/

Hungary Zyxel Hungary & SEE https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/

Italy Zyxel Communications Italy https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/

Latvia Zyxel Latvia https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 283 Appendix C Customer Support Lithuania Zyxel Lithuania https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/

Netherlands Zyxel Benelux https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/

Norway Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/

Poland Zyxel Communications Poland https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/

Romania Zyxel Romania https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia Zyxel Russia Slovakia https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/

https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/

Spain Zyxel Communications ES Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/

Sweden Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/

Switzerland Studerus AG https://www.zyxel.ch/de https://www.zyxel.ch/fr Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 284 Appendix C Customer Support South America Turkey Zyxel Turkey A.S. https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/

UK Zyxel Communications UK Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/

Ukraine Zyxel Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Argentina Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Brazil Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda. https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Colombia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Ecuador Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

South America Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Middle East Israel Zyxel Communications Corporation http://il.zyxel.com/

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 285 Appendix C Customer Support Middle East Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

North America USA Oceania Africa Australia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/

NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 286 A P P E N D I X D Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation. Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimers Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Your use of the Zyxel Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. Trademarks Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA The following information applies if you use the product within USA area. FCC EMC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This transmitter must be at least 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Country Code selection feature to be disabled for products marketed to the US/CANADA. Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only, except for relevant user's manual mention that this device can be installed into the external environment. (WAC6553D-E is a device for outdoor use.) BRAZIL The following applies if you use the product within Brazil. Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 287 Appendix D Legal Information CANADA The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area. Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This radio transmitter (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS (NWA1302-AC), 2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA5123-AC), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA5123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC6502DE (WAC6502D-S, WAC6502D-E), 2468C-

WAC6503DS (WAC6503D-S), 2468C-WAC6552DS (WAC6552D-S), 2468C-WAC6553DE (WAC6553D-E), 2468C-WAC6303DS (WAC6303D-S), 2468C-WAC6103DI (WAC6103D-I), 2468C-WAC5302DS (WAC5302D-S), 2468C-WAX650S (WAX650S)) has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 288 Appendix D Legal Information Antenna Information ANTENNA MODEL NO. CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARK NWA1123-ACv2 NWA1123-AC HD NWA1302-AC NWA5123-AC NWA5123-AC HD WAC6502D-E WAC6502D-S WAC6503D-S WAC6553D-E WAC6103D-I Monopole Monopole I-PEX Monopole I-PEX Monopole Monopole I-PEX Monopole I-PEX TYPE PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Loop Loop PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Loop Loop Loop Dipole UFL UFL UFL UFL I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX RSMA IPEX IPEX N type U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.08 3.07 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.08 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.07 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5 4 4 4.5 3.28 3.37 3.15 4.33 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725~5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz) 3.78 (5725~5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 5 (5150-5250 MHz) 5 (5250-5350 MHz) 5 (5470-5725 MHz) 5 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.91 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 7 6 6 7 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.23 (5725-5850 MHz) Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.36 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz) 5.20 (5725-5850 MHz) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 289 ANTENNA MODEL NO. CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARK Appendix D Legal Information TYPE Loop Loop PIFA Direction Direction I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX U.FL U.FL 1 2 3 1 2 1 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 1.12 (2400-2483.5 MHz) Direction I-PEX 0.8 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 4.22 (5150-5250 MHz) Direction U.FL 0 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5 (5150-5250 MHz) 5 (5250-5350 MHz) 5 (5470-5725 MHz) 5 (5725-5850 MHz) 1.29 (5150-5250 MHz) 1.07 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.34 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.51 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5250-5350 MHz) 4.61 (5470-5725 MHz) 4.68 (5725-5850 MHz) WAC5302D-S WAC6303D-S WAC6552D-S SECTX-DB r2.0 WAX650S If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid, The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and Where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna model(s), and the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.23 of RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated. If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz, the following attention must be paid. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. L'metteur/rcepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Le prsent metteur radio (2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA1123-AC v2), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA1123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC5302DS

(NWA1302-AC), 2468C-NWA5123AC (NWA5123-AC), 2468C-NWA5123ACHD (NWA5123-AC HD), 2468C-WAC6502DE (WAC6502D-S, WAC6502D-E), 2468C-WAC6503DS (WAC6503D-S), 2468C-WAC6552DS (WAC6552D-S), 2468C-WAC6553DE (WAC6553D-E), 2468C-

WAC6303DS (WAC6303D-S), 2468C-WAC6103DI (WAC6103D-I), 2468C-WAC5302DS (WAC5302D-S), 2468C-WAX650S (WAX650S)) a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 290 Appendix D Legal Information Informations Antenne MODLE D'ANTENNE NB. CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARQUE NWA1123-ACv2 NWA1123-AC HD NWA1302-AC NWA5123-AC NWA5123-AC HD WAC6502D-E WAC6502D-S WAC6503D-S WAC6553D-E WAC6103D-I Monopole Monopole I-PEX Monopole I-PEX Monopole Monopole I-PEX Monopole I-PEX TYPE PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Loop Loop PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Loop Loop Loop Dipole UFL UFL UFL UFL I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX RSMA IPEX IPEX N type U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.08 3.07 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.08 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3.07 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 3 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5 4 4 4.5 3.28 3.37 3.15 4.33 4.06 (5150~5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725~5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150~5250 MHz) 3.78 (5725~5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 5 (5150-5250 MHz) 5 (5250-5350 MHz) 5 (5470-5725 MHz) 5 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.91 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 4 (5150-5250 MHz) 4 (5725-5850 MHz) 7 6 6 7 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.23 (5725-5850 MHz) Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5725-5850 MHz) Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.36 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz) 5.20 (5725-5850 MHz) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 291 MODLE D'ANTENNE NB. CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5G GAIN REMARQUE Appendix D Legal Information TYPE Loop Loop PIFA Direction Direction I-PEX I-PEX I-PEX U.FL U.FL 1 2 3 1 2 1 5.82 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5.02 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 1.12 (2400-2483.5 MHz) Direction I-PEX 0.8 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 4.22 (5150-5250 MHz) Direction U.FL 0 (2400-2483.5 MHz) 5 (5150-5250 MHz) 5 (5250-5350 MHz) 5 (5470-5725 MHz) 5 (5725-5850 MHz) 1.29 (5150-5250 MHz) 1.07 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.34 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.51 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5250-5350 MHz) 4.61 (5470-5725 MHz) 4.68 (5725-5850 MHz) WAC5302D-S WAC6303D-S WAC6552D-S SECTX-DB r2.0 WAX650S Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est active pour ce produit, il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande de 5 150 5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

Pour les dispositifs munis d'antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie pour l'exploitation point point et lexploitation non point point, selon le cas;

Lorsqu'il y a lieu, les types d'antennes (s'il y en a plusieurs), les numros de modle de l'antenne et les pires angles d'inclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme l'exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d'lvation, nonce la section 6.2.2.3 du CNR-247, doivent tre clairement indiqus. Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est active pour ce produit, il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes. Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. Industry Canada radiation exposure statement This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 22cm (NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC HD) between the radiator and your body. This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 22 cm (NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC HD) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Caution:

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-

5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.

(v) WAC6553D-E is an outdoor device and only uses 5G Band 4 (5725-5850 MHz). Avertissement:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--

d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.

(v) WAC6553D-E est un appareil exterieur et seulement utilise 5G Bane 4 (5725-5850 MHz). NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 292 Appendix D Legal Information EUROPEAN UNION The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/

EU (RED). And this product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below table:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. Zyxel recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for the 5GHz wireless LANs. If this device for operation in the band 5150-5350 MHz, it is for indoor use only. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body. The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:

NWA1123-ACv2 and NWA5123-AC The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.95 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 199.07 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 743.02 mW. WAC6503D-S The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 99.54 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 183.65 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 941.89 mW. WAC6502D-E and WAC6502D-S The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 94.19 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 194.98 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 986.28 mW. WAC6553D-E The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.26 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.41 mW. NWA1123-AC PRO and WAC6103D-I The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.68 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.75 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 966.05 mW. NWA1302-AC and WAC5302D-S The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 93.33 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.31 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 391.74 mW. NWA1123-AC HD and NWA5123-AC HD The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.274 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.40 mW. WAC6303D-S WAC6552D-S WAX650S The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 194.09 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.41 mW. The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 93.11 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 914.11 mW. The band 2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz is 91.2 mW, The band 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 177.01 mW, The band 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 899.5 mW. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 293 Appendix D Legal Information Espaol

(Spanish) etina

(Czech) Deutsch

(German) Eesti keel

(Estonian)

(Greek) English Franais

(French) Hrvatski

(Croatian) slenska

(Icelandic)

(Bulgarian) Zyxel , 2014/53/C. National Restrictions The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Por medio de la presente Zyxel declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 2014/53/UE.. Zyxel tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 2014/53/EU. Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede Zyxel erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 2014/53/EU. National Restrictions In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Hiermit erklrt Zyxel, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Zyxel seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 2014/53/EU phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Zyxel 2014/53/EU. Hereby, Zyxel declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Par la prsente Zyxel dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 2014/53/EU. Zyxel ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU. Hr me lsir, Zyxel v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 2014/53/

EU. Italiano (Italian) Con la presente Zyxel dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 2014/53/EU. National Restrictions This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Ar o Zyxel deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 2014/53/EU btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Latvieu valoda

(Latvian) National Restrictions The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk check http://www.esd.lv for more details. informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Lietuvi kalba

(Lithuanian) iuo Zyxel deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 2014/53/EU Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar

(Hungarian) Alulrott, Zyxel nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 2014/53/EU irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, Zyxel, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 2014/53/EU. Nederlands

(Dutch) Hierbij verklaart Zyxel dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 2014/53/EU. Polski (Polish) Niniejszym Zyxel owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 2014/53/EU. Portugus

(Portuguese) Zyxel declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 2014/53/

EU. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 294 Appendix D Legal Information Prin prezenta, Zyxel declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 2014/53/EU. Zyxel tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 2014/53/EU. Zyxel izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 2014/53/EU. Suomi (Finnish) Zyxel vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska

(Swedish) Hrmed intygar Zyxel att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 2014/53/EU. Norsk

(Norwegian) Erklrer herved Zyxel at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 2014/53/EU. 1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE AT BE BG HR CY CR DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United Kingdom LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SK SI ES SE CH TR GB Romn

(Romanian) Slovenina

(Slovak) Slovenina

(Slovene) Notes:

Czech Republic Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Professional installation instruction (WAC6553D-E) Please be advised that due to the unique function supplied by this product, the device is intended for use with our interactive entertainment software and licensed third-party only. The product will be distributed through controlled distribution channel and installed by trained professional and will not be sold directly to the general public through retail store. Installation personal This product is designed for specific application and needs to be installed by a qualified personal who has RF and related rule knowledge. The general user shall not attempt to install or change the setting. Installation location The product shall be installed at a location where the radiating antenna can be kept 30 cm from nearby person in normal operation condition to meet regulatory RF exposure requirement. External antenna Use only the antennas which have been approved by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The non-approved antenna(s) may produce unwanted spurious or excessive RF transmitting power which may lead to the violation of FCC/IC limit and is prohibited. Installation procedure Please refer to user's manual for the detail. Warning 1 2 3 4 5 Please carefully select the installation position and make sure that the final output power does not exceed the limit set force in relevant rules. The violation of the rule could lead to serious federal penalty. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 295 Appendix D Legal Information Instructions d'installation professionnelle (WAC6553D-E) Veuillez noter que l'appareil etant dedie a une fonction unique, il doit etre utilise avec notre logiciel proprietaire de divertissement interactif . Ce produit sera propose par un reseau de distribution controle et installe par des professionels; il ne sera pas propose au grand public par le reseau de la grande distribution. Installation Ce produit est destine a un usage specifique et doit etre installe par un personnel qualifie maitrisant les radiofrequences et les regles s'y rapportant. L'installation et les reglages ne doivent pas etre modifies par l'utilisateur final. Emplacement d'installation En usage normal, afin de respecter les exigences reglementaires concernant l'exposition aux radiofrequences, ce produit doit etre installe de facon a respecter une distance de 30 cm entre l'antenne emettrice et les personnes. Antenn externe. Utiliser uniiquement les antennes approuvees par le fabricant. L'utilisation d'autres antennes peut conduire a un niveau de rayonnement essentiel ou non essentiel depassant les niveaux limites definis par FCC/IC, ce qui est interdit. Procedure d'installation Choisir avec soin la position d'installation et s'assurer que la puissance de sortie ne depasse pas les limites en vigueur. La violation de cette regle peut conduire a de serieuses penalites federales. 1 2 3 4 5 Consulter le manuel d'utilisation. Avertissement Safety Warnings Environment statement Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor a power outlet. or cord. Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product. This device (WAC6553D-E, WAC6552D-S) must be grounded by qualified service personnel. Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor. Contact the qualified service personnel if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available. The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device, For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible. ErP (Energy-related Products) (NWA1123-ACv2, NWA1123-AC HD, NWA5123-AC, NWA5123-AC HD, WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, and WAC6503D-S) Zyxel products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W. For wireless setting, please refer to the chapter about wireless settings for more detail. European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development. Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gem den rtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmll entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natrliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schtzen. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 296 Appendix D Legal Information El smbolo de abajo indica que segn las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batera debern depositarse como basura separada de la domstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida til, llvelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el producto, la recogida por separado ste y/o su batera ayudar a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y medioambiental. Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les rglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent tre limins sparment des ordures mnagres. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte spare de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera conomiser les ressources naturelles et protger l'environnement et la sant humaine. Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana. Symbolen innebr att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat frn hushllsavfallet. Nr den hr produkten nr slutet av sin livslngd ska du ta den till en tervinningsstation. Vid tiden fr kasseringen bidrar du till en bttre milj och mnsklig hlsa genom att gra dig av med den p ett tervinningsstlle. MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA1123-ACv2) 0.316 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA1123-AC PRO) 0.448 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA1123-AC HD) 0.685 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA1302-AC) 0.109 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA5123-AC) 0.316 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6503D-S) 0.744 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6502D-S) 0.320 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6502D-E) 0.403 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6553D-E) 0.539 mW/cm2 30 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6103D-I) 0.448 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC5302D-S) 0.109 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (NWA5123-AC HD) 0.685 mW/cm2 20 cm MPE 1mW/cm2 (WAC6303D-S) 0.349 mW/cm2 20 cm

(WAC6553D-E) NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 297 Appendix D Legal Information

( : / 110V AC 230V AC)

About the Symbols Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents. Explanation of the Symbols SYMBOL EXPLANATION Alternating current (AC):

AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction. DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers. A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor. Direct current (DC):

Earth; ground:

Class II equipment:

The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or reinforced insulation. Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 298 Appendix D Legal Information Registration Open Source Licenses Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com. This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 299 Index Index advertising settings 122 BLE 120 Bluetooth Low Energy 20, 22, 23, 120 Bluetooth Smart 120 iBeacon 120 iBeacon ID 120 major 120 minor 120 UUID 120 UUID format 122 boot module 213 BSS 17 C CA and certificates 156 CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates CAPWAP 94 CEF (Common Event Format) 198, 203 Certificate Authority (CA) see certificates Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) 161 Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 156 vs OCSP 170 certificates 155 advantages of 156 and CA 156 and FTP 189 and HTTPS 177 and SSH 186 and WWW 178 certification path 156, 163, 168 expired 156 factory-default 156 file formats 156 fingerprints 164, 169 importing 159 not used for encryption 156 revoked 156 self-signed 156, 160 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 300 Symbols Numbers 802.11k 20, 22, 23 802.11r 20, 22, 23 802.11v 20, 22, 23 AC. See AP Controller access 53 access privileges 17 access users 123 see also users 123 admin users 123 multiple logins 128 see also users 123 alerts 196, 200, 201, 203, 204, 205 antenna switch 222 AP Controller 20, 21, 23, 26 applications MBSSID 17 Repeater 14 Assisted Roaming. See 802.11k/v A B backing up configuration files 208 Basic Service Set see BSS Bluetooth BLE. See Bluetooth Low Energy advertisements 121 serial number 163, 168 storage space 158, 166 thumbprint algorithms 157 thumbprints 157 used for authentication 156 verifying fingerprints 157 certification requests 160, 161 certifications viewing 298 channel 18 CLI 32, 57 button 57 messages 57 popup window 57 Reference Guide 2 cold start 65 commands 32 sent by Web Configurator 57 Common Event Format (CEF) 198, 203 comparison table 19, 21, 22 configuration information 217, 235 configuration files 206 at restart 208 backing up 208 downloading 209 downloading with FTP 189 editing 206 how applied 207 lastgood.conf 208, 210 managing 207 startup-config.conf 210 startup-config-bad.conf 208 syntax 206 system-default.conf 210 uploading 211 uploading with FTP 189 use without restart 206 contact information 281 cookies 53 copyright 287 CPU usage 68, 70 current date/time 68, 173 daylight savings 174 setting manually 175 time server 176 customer support 281 Index D date 173 daylight savings 174 DCS 106 DHCP 172 diagnostics 217, 235 disclaimer 287 domain name 172 dual radios 18 and domain name 172 dual-radio application 18 dynamic channel selection 106 E e-mail F daily statistics report 194 encryption 14 ESSID 246 Extended Service Set IDentification 130 Fast Roaming. See 802.11r FCC interference statement 287 file extensions configuration files 206 shell scripts 206 file manager 206 Firefox 53 firmware and restart 212 boot module, see boot module current version 68, 213 getting updated 212 uploading 212, 213 uploading with FTP 189 flash usage 68 FTP 32, 189 and certificates 189 with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 189 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 301 HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, see HTTPS CLI Reference 2 G Guide H HTTP over SSL, see HTTPS redirect to HTTPS 178 vs HTTPS 177 HTTPS 177 and certificates 177 authenticating clients 177 avoiding warning messages 180 example 178 vs HTTP 177 with Internet Explorer 179 with Netscape Navigator 179 I IEEE 802.1x 131 interface status 69 interfaces as DHCP servers 172 interference 18 Internet Explorer 53 Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP Address 94, 231 gateway IP address 94 IP subnet 94 IPv6 273 addressing 273 EUI-64 275 global address 273 interface ID 275 link-local address 273 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 273 ping 273 prefix 273 Index prefix length 273 stateless autoconfiguration 275 unspecified address 274 permissions 53 JavaScripts 53 key pairs 155 J Java K L lastgood.conf 208, 210 layer-2 isolation 147 example 147 MAC 148 LED suppression 219 LEDs 34 Blinking 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 load balancing 106 Locator LED 220 log messages categories 201, 203, 204, 205 debugging 91 regular 91 types of 91 logout logs Web Configurator 57 e-mail profiles 196 e-mailing log messages 93, 200 formats 198 log consolidation 201 settings 196 syslog servers 196 system 196 types of 196 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 302 Index power off 66 power on 65 product registration 299 Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 156 Management Information Base (MIB) 190, 191 public-private key pairs 155 My Certificates, see also certificates 158 M MAC address range 68 Management Mode CAPWAP and DHCP 95 management mode 24 Management, NCC 24 Management, Standalone 24 managing the device good habits 32 using FTP. See FTP. MBSSID 17 memory usage 68, 71 messages CLI 57 mode, default 24 model name 67 NCC. See Nebula Control Center Nebula Control Center 24 Netscape Navigator 53 Network Time Protocol (NTP) 175 N P O objects certificates 155 users, account user 123 vs CRL 170 overview 13, 65, 227 pop-up windows 53 Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) 170 R radio 18 Radio Frequency monitor 13 reboot 65, 224 vs reset 224 Reference Guide, CLI 2 registration product 299 remote management FTP, see FTP Telnet 188 WWW, see WWW reports daily 194 daily e-mail 194 reset 247 vs reboot 224 vs shutdown 225 RESET button 66, 247 restart 224 RF interference 18 RF monitor. See Radio Frequency Monitor 2510 (Certificate Management Protocol or CMP) 161 Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm

(RSA) 160 RSA 160, 168, 169 RSSI threshold 137 RFC S SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) 161 screen resolution 53 Secure Socket Layer, see SSL serial number 68 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 303 Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) 161 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP service control and users 176 limitations 176 timeouts 176 Service Set 130 Service Set Identifier see SSID shell scripts 206 downloading 215, 235 editing 214, 234 how applied 207 managing 214, 234 syntax 206 uploading 216, 235 shutdown 66, 225 vs reset 225 SNMP 190 agents 190 Get 190 GetNext 190 Manager 190 managers 190 MIB 190, 191 network components 190 Set 190 Trap 191 traps 191 versions 190 SSH 184 and certificates 186 client requirements 186 encryption methods 186 for secure Telnet 187 how connection is established 185 versions 186 with Linux 187 with Microsoft Windows 187 SSID 17 SSID profile pre-configured 17 SSID profiles 17 SSL 177 starting the device 65 startup-config.conf 210 if errors 208 missing at restart 208 Index present at restart 208 startup-config-bad.conf 208 station 106 statistics status 229 daily e-mail report 194 stopping the device 65 supported browsers 53 syslog 198, 203 syslog servers, see also logs system log, see logs system name 67, 172 system uptime 68 system-default.conf 210 Telnet 188 with SSH 187 time 173 time servers (default) 175 trademarks 287 Transport Layer Security (TLS) 189 troubleshooting 217, 235 Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 165 T U upgrading firmware 212 uploading configuration files 211 firmware 212 shell scripts 214, 234 usage CPU 68, 70 flash 68 memory 68, 71 onboard flash 68 user authentication 123 user name rules 124 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 304 Index wireless profile 130 layer-2 isolation 130 MAC filtering 130 radio 130 security 130 SSID 130 wireless security 17, 246 wireless station 106 Wizard Setup 73 WLAN interface 18 WPA2 131 WWW 177 and certificates 178 see also HTTP, HTTPS 177 Z ZDP 27 ZON Utility 27 ZyXEL Discovery Protocol 27 user objects 123 users 123 access, see also access users admin (type) 123 admin, see also admin users and service control 176 currently logged in 69 default lease time 127, 129 default reauthentication time 127, 129 lease time 126 limited-admin (type) 123 lockout 128 reauthentication time 126 types of 123 user (type) 123 user names 124 Vantage Report (VRPT) 198, 203 Virtual Local Area Network 99 VLAN 99 introduction 99 VRPT (Vantage Report) 198, 203 V W warm start 65 warranty 298 note 298 WDS 14 Web Configurator 31, 53 access 53 requirements 53 supported browsers 53 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 131 wireless channel 246 wireless client 106 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) 14 wireless LAN 246 Wireless network overview 105 wireless network example 105 NWA/WAC/WAX Series Users Guide 305

Users Guide NAP Series 802.11ac Dual-Radio Nebula Cloud Managed Access Points Version 6.0 Edition 1, 03/2020 Default Login Details Web Address http://(DHCP-assigned IP) User Name Password http://192.168.1.2 or admin Assigned by NCC or 1234 Note: Login is required only when the NAP cannot be accessed using NCC. Copyright 2020 Zyxel Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. This is a Users Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide Web Configurator Online Help Nebula Control Center Users Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the NAP and register it with the Nebula Control Center

(NCC) for cloud management. Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information. This Users Guide shows how to manage the Nebula devices remotely. The features of these devices are managed through Nebula Control Center. More Information Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the NAP. NAP Series Users Guide 2 Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions All models in this series may be referred to as the NAP in this guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Configuration >

Network > IP Setting means you first click Configuration in the navigation panel, then the Network sub menu and finally the IP Setting tab to get to that screen. Icons Used in Figures Figures in this guide may use the following generic icons. The NAP icon is not an exact representation of your device. NAP Router Switch Internet Server Desktop Laptop IP Phone Printer Nebula Switch Nebula Gateway Smart T.V. Access Point Smartphone Set-top box NAP Series Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 7 The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 21 Dashboard ............................................................................................................................................ 26 Network ................................................................................................................................................. 29 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 33 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................... 38 NAP Series Users Guide 4 Table of Contents Table of Contents Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3 Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Chapter 1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................7 1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.1 Management .......................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.2 Dual-Radio ............................................................................................................................... 8 1.2 Ways to Manage the NAP ............................................................................................................... 9 1.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility .................................................................................................... 10 1.3.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 10 1.3.2 Run the ZON Utility ................................................................................................................. 11 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NAP ............................................................................................ 15 1.5 Hardware Connections ................................................................................................................. 15 1.6 LEDs .................................................................................................................................................. 15 1.6.1 NAP303 ................................................................................................................................... 16 1.6.2 NAP203 ................................................................................................................................... 17 1.6.3 NAP102 ................................................................................................................................... 19 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................21 2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 21 2.2 Access .............................................................................................................................................. 21 2.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ............................................................................................... 22 2.3.1 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................... 23 2.3.2 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 24 2.3.3 Warning Messages ................................................................................................................ 25 Chapter 3 Dashboard ..........................................................................................................................................26 3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 26 3.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 26 3.2 Dashboard ...................................................................................................................................... 26 Chapter 4 Network...............................................................................................................................................29 4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 29 NAP Series Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 29 4.2 IP Setting ......................................................................................................................................... 29 4.3 VLAN ................................................................................................................................................ 31 Chapter 5 Maintenance......................................................................................................................................33 5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 33 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 33 5.2 Shell Script ........................................................................................................................................ 33 5.3 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................... 34 5.4 View Log .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................38 6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 38 6.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED .................................................................................... 38 6.3 NAP Access and Login .................................................................................................................. 39 6.4 Internet Access ............................................................................................................................... 40 6.5 Wireless Connections ..................................................................................................................... 41 6.6 Resetting the NAP ........................................................................................................................... 43 6.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help ............................................................................................. 44 Appendix A Customer Support ....................................................................................................... 45 Appendix B Legal Information ......................................................................................................... 51 Index ...................................................................................................................................................60 NAP Series Users Guide 6 C H A P T E R 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview This Users Guide covers the following models: NAP102, NAP203, NAP303 and NAP353. Your NAP is a wireless AP (Access Point). It extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. Table 1 NAP Series Comparison Table FEATURES NAP102 NAP203 NAP303 NAP353 One Ethernet LAN Port One PoE Enabled Uplink Port External Antennas One DC Power Socket No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes No 1.1.1 Management The NAP is managed and provisioned automatically by the NCC (Nebula Control Center) when it is connected to the Internet and has been registered to a site and organization. If you are having problems with accessing the Internet and the NCC, you may need to change the NAPs VLAN setting or manually set its IP address through its built-in web-based configuration tool (web configurator). You can use the Zyxel ZON utility, or check the connected gateway for the NAP's current LAN IP address. Alternatively, disconnect the gateway or disable its DHCP server function, connect your computer to the NAPs LAN/Ethernet port and use the NAP's default static LAN IP address (192.168.1.2) to access the web configurator. Make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NAPs IP address. NAP Series Users Guide 7 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1.2 Dual-Radio The NAP is equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can configure two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously. Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the effects of radio interference. You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming. NAP Series Users Guide 8 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1 Dual-Radio Application 1.2 Ways to Manage the NAP You can use the following ways to manage the NAP. If you need to change the NAPs VLAN setting or manually set its IP address before connecting it to the Internet, use its built-in Web Configurator. Web Configurator The Web Configurator allows basic NAP setup and monitoring using an Internet browser. This Users Guide provides information about the Web Configurator. NCC (Nebula Control Center) With the NCC, you can remotely manage and monitor the NAP through a cloud-based network management system. See the NCC Users Guide for more information. ZON Utility Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility is a utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a more simple and efficient way. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your computer (Windows operating system). For more information on ZON Utility see Section 1.3 on page 10. NAP Series Users Guide 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Command-Line Interface (CLI) The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the NAP. You can access it using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet). See the Command Reference Guide for more information. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore. 1.3 Zyxel One Network (ZON) Utility ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It detects devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without having to be near it. The ZON Utility issues requests via Zyxel Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query, the device responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on your computer (Windows operating system). 1.3.1 Requirements Before installing the ZON Utility on your PC, please make sure it meets the requirements listed below. Operating System At the time of writing, the ZON Utility is compatible with:

Windows 7 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Windows 8 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Windows 8.1 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Window 10 (both 32-bit / 64-bit versions) Note: To check for your Windows operating system version, right-click on My Computer >

Properties. You should see this information in the General tab. Here are the minimum hardware requirements to use the ZON Utility on your PC. Hardware Core i3 processor 2GB RAM 100MB free hard disk WXGA (Wide XGA 1280x800) NAP Series Users Guide 10 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.3.2 Run the ZON Utility 1 Double-click the ZON Utility to run it. 2 The first time you run the ZON Utility, you will see if your device and firmware version support the ZON Utility. Click the OK button to close this screen. Figure 2 Supported Devices and Versions If you want to check the supported models and firmware versions later, you can click the Show information about ZON icon in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Then select the Supported model and firmware version link. If your device is not listed here, see the device release notes for ZON utility support. The release notes are in the firmware zip file on the Zyxel web site. NAP Series Users Guide 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 3 ZON Utility Screen 3 Select a network adapter to which your supported devices are connected. Figure 4 Network Adapter 4 Click the Go button for the ZON Utility to discover all supported devices in your network. NAP Series Users Guide 12 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 5 Discovery 5 The ZON Utility screen shows the devices discovered. Figure 6 ZON Utility Screen 6 Select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. Some functions may not be available for your devices. Note: You must know the selected device admin password before taking actions on the device using the ZON utility icons. NAP Series Users Guide 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 7 Password Prompt The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen. Table 2 ZON Utility Icons ICON DESCRIPTION 1 IP configuration Change the selected devices IP address. 2 Renew IP Address Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address. 3 Reboot Device Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting or upgrading new firmware. 4 Reset Configuration to Default Use this icon to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations. 5 Locator LED Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink. 6 Web GUI Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will need a username and password to log in. 7 Firmware Upgrade Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model. Make sure you have downloaded the firmware from the Zyxel website to your computer and unzipped it in advance. 8 Change Password Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know the current admin password before changing to a new one. 9 Configure NCC Discovery You must have Internet access to use this feature. Use this icon to enable or disable the Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature on the selected device. If its enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, itll go into the Nebula cloud management mode. 10 ZAC Use this icon to run the Zyxel AP Configurator of the selected AP. 11 Clear and Rescan Use this icon to clear the list and discover all devices on the connected network again. 12 Save Configuration Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected device. 13 Settings Use this icon to select a network adaptor for the computer on which the ZON utility is installed, and the utility language. NAP Series Users Guide 14 Chapter 1 Introduction The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen. Table 3 ZON Utility Fields DESCRIPTION This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered. This field displays the model name of the discovered device. Firmware Version This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device. MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device. This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that first received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility. System Name This field displays the system name of the discovered device. This field displays where the discovered device is. This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done successfully. As the NAP does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address and Flash Locator LED, this field displays Update failed, Not support Renew IP address and Not support Flash Locator LED respectively. This field displays if the discovered device supports the Nebula Control Center (NCC) discovery feature. If its enabled, the selected device will try to connect to the NCC. Once the selected device is connected to and has registered in the NCC, itll go into the Nebula cloud management mode. Serial Number Enter the admin password of the discovered device to display its serial number. Hardware Version This field displays the hardware version of the discovered device. LABEL Type Model IP Address Location Status NCC Discovery 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NAP Do the following things regularly to make the NAP more secure and to manage it more effectively. Change the system password through the NCC often. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. 1.5 Hardware Connections See your Quick Start Guide and Section 1.1.1 on page 7 for information on making hardware connections. 1.6 LEDs The LEDs of your NAP303 or NAP203 can be controlled using the Suppression feature to turn LEDs on or off after the device is ready. This can be done through the NCC. Following are LED descriptions for the NAP series models. NAP Series Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.6.1 NAP303 Figure 8 NAP303 LEDs The LEDs will stay ON when the NAP303 is ready. You can change this setting with LED suppression. The following table describes the LEDs. Table 4 NAP303 LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Slowly blinks amber for one second and green for one second alternatively. The NAP is booting up. Green On The NAP is ready for use. Slow Blinking (on for 1s, off for 1s) The wireless module of the NAP is disabled or failed. Red On There is system error and the NAP cannot boot up, or the NAP suffered a system failure. The NAP is undergoing firmware upgrade. Fast Blinking (on for 50ms, off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (blink for 3 times, off for 3s) The Uplink port is disconnected. NAP Series Users Guide 16 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 4 NAP303 LEDs (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Management Green On The NAP is managed by the NCC. Amber Green Amber Green Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) Slowly blinks amber for one second and green for one second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The NAP is connected to the NCC, but not registered. The NAP is searching for (discovering) the NCC. The NCC is connecting to the registered NAP. WLAN Green WLAN Green UPLINK Amber/

Green LAN Amber/

Green On Off On Off On Off On Blinking Off Locator White Blinking The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection. Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps). The port is not connected. Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection. Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port. The LAN port is not connected. The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual location of the NAP between several devices in the network. Blinking The NAP is sending/receiving data through the port. Off The Locator function is off. 1.6.2 NAP203 The LEDs will stay ON when the NAP203 is ready. You can change this setting with LED suppression. NAP Series Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 9 NAP203 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs. Table 5 NAP203 LEDs LED PWR/SYS COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION The NAP is booting up. Red Green Green Red Slowly blinks red for one second and green for one second alternatively. On On Fast Blinking (on for 50ms, Off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) Slow Blinking (blink for 2 times, Off for 3s) The NAP is ready for use. There is system error and the NAP cannot boot up, or the NAP suffered a system failure. The NAP is undergoing firmware upgrade. The Uplink port is disconnected. The wireless module of the NAP is disabled or failed. NAP Series Users Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 5 NAP203 LEDs (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Management Green On The NAP is managed by the NCC. Amber Green Amber Green Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) Slowly blinks amber for one second and green for one second alternatively. Blinks amber and green alternatively 3 times and then turns solid green for 3 seconds. The NAP is connected to the NCC, but not registered. The NAP is searching for (discovering) the NCC. The NCC is connecting to the registered NAP. WLAN Green On The antenna switch is set to Ceiling for the radio. Amber On The antenna switch is set to Wall for the radio. WLAN Green The antenna switch is set to Ceiling for the radio. Amber On The antenna switch is set to Wall for the radio. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active. The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is active. The 5 GHz WLAN is not active. Off On Off On Off On UPLINK Amber/

Green LAN Amber/

Green Blinking Off Locator White Blinking Blinking The NAP is sending/receiving data through the port. Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection. Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps). The port is not connected. Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection. Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection

(1000 Mbps). The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port. The LAN port is not connected. The Locator is activated and will blink to show the actual location of the NAP between several devices in the network. Off The Locator function is off. 1.6.3 NAP102 The following are the LED descriptions for your NAP102. NAP Series Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 10 NAP102 LED The following are the LED descriptions for your NAP102. Table 6 NAP102 LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Amber Green Amber Green Slowly blinks amber for one second and green for one second alternatively Slowly blinks amber and green alternatively three times and turns steady green for three seconds The NAP is booting up or is connecting to the NCC. The NCC is connecting to the registered NAP. Green On The NAP is ready for use and its wireless interface is activated. Slow Blinking (On for 1s, Off for 1s) The NAP is connected to the NCC, but not registered or the wireless module failed or is disabled. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) The Locator LED is on. Red On The NAP failed to boot up or is experience system failure. Fast Blinking (On for 50ms, Off for 50ms) Slow Blinking (blink for 3 times, Off for 3s) The NAP is undergoing firmware upgrade. The Uplink port is disconnected. Amber On The NAP is powered up. NAP Series Users Guide 20 C H A P T E R 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The NAP Web Configurator allows easy management using an Internet browser. Use this for troubleshooting if your device cannot access the Internet. Use Internet Explorer 10.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 36.0 and later versions, Safari 9.0 and later In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:

versions, or Google Chrome 38.0 and later versions. Allow pop-up windows. Enable JavaScript (enabled by default). Enable Java permissions (enabled by default). Enable cookies. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher. 2.2 Access 1 Make sure your NAP (Nebula AP) hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.1.1 on page 7. 2 Make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NAPs IP address. Browse to http://(NAPs IP address). See Section 1.1 on page 7 for more information. 3 4 The Login screen appears. NAP Series Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 5 Enter the user name (default: admin) and password (default: 1234). If the NAP is being managed or has been managed by the NCC, check the NCC's Site-Wide > Configure > General setting screen for the NAP's current password. Click the Visit button if you want to open the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC) login page in a new tab or window. The NCC is a cloud-based network management system that allows you to remotely manage and monitor the NAP. 6 Click Login. 2.3 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Dashboard screen. This guide uses the NAP102 screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models. NAP Series Users Guide 22 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Figure 11 The Web Configurators Main Screen The Web Configurators main screen is divided into these parts:

A - Title Bar B - Navigation Panel C - Main Window 2.3.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of how deep into the Web Configurator you navigate. Figure 12 Title Bar The icons provide the following functions. Table 7 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons DESCRIPTION LABEL Logout Help About nebula About Click About to display basic information about the NAP. Click this to log out of the Web Configurator. Click this to open the help page for the current screen. Click this to display basic information about the NAP. Click this to open the NCC web site login page in a new tab or window. NAP Series Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Figure 13 About The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen. Table 8 About LABEL DESCRIPTION Boot Module This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the NAP. Current Version This shows the firmware version of the NAP. Released Date This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released. OK Click this to close the screen. 2.3.2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NAP features. Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel menus or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the NAPs navigation panel menus and their screens. Figure 14 Navigation Panel NAP Series Users Guide 24 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Dashboard The dashboard displays general device information, and AP information in widgets that you can re-

arrange to suit your needs. For details on the Dashboards features, see Chapter 3 on page 26. Configuration Menu Use the configuration menu screens to configure the NAPs features. Table 9 Configuration Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION Network Configure the IP address for the NAP Ethernet interface. IP Setting VLAN Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings. 2.3.3 Warning Messages Figure 15 Warning Message Warning messages, such as those resulting from misconfiguration, display in a pop up window. NAP Series Users Guide 25 C H A P T E R 3 Dashboard 3.1 Overview Use the Dashboard screens to check status information about the NAP. 3.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The main Dashboard screen (Section 3.2 on page 26) displays the NAPs general device information, and client information. 3.2 Dashboard This screen is the first thing you see when you log into the NAP. It also appears every time you click the Dashboard icon in the navigation panel. The Dashboard displays general AP information, and client information in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets. NAP Series Users Guide 26 Chapter 3 Dashboard Figure 16 Dashboard The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Dashboard LABEL DESCRIPTION AP Information MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the NAP. Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the NAP. Product Model This field displays the model name of the NAP. 2.4G Channel Information This field displays the channel number the NAP is using and its output power in the 2.4 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled. 5G Channel Information This field displays the channel number the NAP is using and its output power in the 5 GHz spectrum. This shows Not activated if the wireless LAN is disabled. Ethernet This field displays whether the NAPs Ethernet port is connected and the IP address of the gateway to which the NAP is connected. Internet This field displays whether the NAP is connecting to the Internet. This field displays whether the NAP can connect to the Zyxel Nebula Control Center (NCC). This field displays whether the NAP has been registered and can be managed by the NCC. Nebula Connectivity Status Nebula Control Center Activation Status Use Proxy to Access NCC This displays whether the NAP uses a proxy server to access the NCC (Nebula Control Center). NAP Series Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Dashboard If the NAP cannot connect to the Internet or to NCC, an error message is shown on this screen, as in the following. NAP Series Users Guide 28 C H A P T E R 4 Network 4.1 Overview This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of your NAP. The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Figure 17 IP Setup The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your NAP. The gateway IP address is 192.168.1.1 and the managed IP address of the NAP is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the NAP is assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used. The gateway and the NAP must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate with each other. 4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The IP Setting screen (Section 4.2 on page 29) configures the NAPs LAN IP address. The VLAN screen (Section 4.3 on page 31) configures the NAPs VLAN settings. 4.2 IP Setting Use this screen to configure the IP address for your NAP. To access this screen, click Configuration >

Network > IP Setting. NAP Series Users Guide 29 Chapter 4 Network Figure 18 Configuration > Network > IP Setting Each field is described in the following table. Table 11 IP Setting LABEL IP Address Assignment DESCRIPTION Use Fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Get Automatically Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. IP Address Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The NAP sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. DNS Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server. Use Proxy to Access NCC If the NAP is behind a proxy server, you need to select this option and configure the proxy server settings so that the NAP can access the NCC through the proxy server. Proxy Server Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy Port Enter service port number used by the proxy server. NAP Series Users Guide 30 Chapter 4 Network Table 11 IP Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Select this option if the proxy server requires authentication before it grants access to the Internet. User Name Enter your proxy user name. Password Enter your proxy password. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the NAP. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 4.3 VLAN This section discusses how to configure the NAPs VLAN settings. The management VLAN assigned to the NAP should allow it to connect to the Internet through your network. Note: Misconfiguring the management VLAN settings in your NAP can make it inaccessible. If this happens, you will have to reset the NAP. Figure 19 Management VLAN Setup For example, to access and manage the NAP from a computer (A), the NAP and the switch Bs ports to which computer A and the NAP are connected should be in the same VLAN, as shown in the figure above. Note: Make sure your VLAN settings allow the NAP to connect to the Internet. A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. NAP Series Users Guide 31 Chapter 4 Network IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your NAP. To access this screen, click Configuration >

Network > VLAN. Figure 20 Configuration > Network > VLAN Each field is described in the following table. Table 12 VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter a VLAN ID for the NAP. VLAN Settings Management VLAN ID Untagged/

Tagged Set whether the NAP adds the VLAN ID to outbound traffic transmitted through its Ethernet port. Apply Reset Click Apply to save your changes back to the NAP. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. NAP Series Users Guide 32 C H A P T E R 5 Maintenance 5.1 Overview The Maintenance screens let you manage shell script files on the NAP, generate a diagnostic file, or view log messages. 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Shell Script screen (Section 5.2 on page 33) stores, names, downloads, and uploads shell script files. The Diagnostics screen (Section 5.3 on page 34) generates a file containing the NAPs configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during troubleshooting. The Log > View Log screen (Section 5.4 on page 35) displays the NAPs current log messages when it is disconnected from the NCC. 5.2 Shell Script A shell script is a list of commands which output diagnostic information on the NAP. Customer support might request that you upload and run a shell script during troubleshooting. All uploaded shell scripts run when you click Diagnostic > Collect Now. You can create a shell script on your local computer using a text editor. Shell script files must have a .zysh filename extension. The file name of the shell script must consist of 125 characters including letters, numbers, and the following special characters: ~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=

Click Maintenance > Shell Script to open this screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name, download, and upload shell script files. Figure 21 Maintenance > Shell Script NAP Series Users Guide 33 Chapter 5 Maintenance Each field is described in the following table. Table 13 Maintenance > Shell Script LABEL DESCRIPTION Rename Use this button to change the name of a shell script file on the NAP. The name must consist of 125 characters including letters, numbers, and the following special characters: ~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=

The name must be unique. Remove Click a shell script files row to select it and click Delete to delete the shell script file from the NAP. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file. Download Click a shell script files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Copy Use this button to create a duplicate of a shell script file. Select a shell script, click Copy, and then enter a name for the duplicate file. The name must consist of 125 characters including letters, numbers, and the following special characters: ~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=

The name must be unique.

This column displays the number for each shell script file entry. File Name This column displays the label that identifies the shell script file. Size This column displays the size of the shell script file, in KB. Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the shell script file was last changed or saved. Upload Shell Script The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from your computer to your NAP. File Enter the path of the file you want to upload, or click Browse... to find it. Browse... Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload. Upload Click Upload to start uploading the file. This process may take several minutes. 5.3 Diagnostics This screen allows you to download a file containing the NAPs configuration and diagnostic information. You might need to send this file to customer support for troubleshooting. Note: When you click Collect Now, the NAP runs all uploaded shell scripts and includes their output in the diagnostic file. For information on uploading shell scripts, see Section 5.2 on page 33. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostics screen. Click Collect Now to start creating a new diagnostic file. NAP Series Users Guide 34 Chapter 5 Maintenance Figure 22 Maintenance > Diagnostics The Debug Information Center window shows the progress of data collection. When the data collection process is finished, click Download to save the most recent diagnostic file to your computer. Figure 23 Maintenance > Diagnostics: Debug Information Collector 5.4 View Log Nebula Control Center (NCC) downloads log messages from the NAP periodically, and then deletes the downloaded log messages from the NAP. The Maintenance > Log screen allows you to view log messages that have not yet been downloaded by NCC. This can with troubleshooting when the NAP is disconnected from NCC. Note: After the log reaches the maximum number of log messages, each new log message automatically overwrites the oldest log message. Events that generate an alert as well as a log message are displayed in red. Regular log messages are displayed in black. Click a column header to sort all rows in the table using that column. Click the cell header again to reverse the sort order. NAP Series Users Guide 35 Chapter 5 Maintenance Figure 24 Maintenance > Log > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Maintenance > Log > View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Filter / Hide Filter Click this button to show or hide the filter settings. Display Priority If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are available. If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Source Interface, Destination Interface, Protocol, Keyword, and Search fields are available. Select the category of the log messages you want to view. You can also view All Logs or view the Debug Log. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Possible values from highest priority to lowest priority are:

any emerg (emergency) alert crit (critical) error warn (warning) notice info (information) Note: This field is read-only if Display is set to Debug Log. Source Address Enter the source IP address of the incoming packet that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter. Destination Address Enter the IP address of the destination of the incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter. Source Interface Select the source interface of the packet that generated the log message. NAP Series Users Guide 36 Chapter 5 Maintenance Table 14 Maintenance > Log > View Log (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination Interface Protocol Keyword Search Refresh

Time Priority Select the destination interface of the packet that generated the log message. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would like to see. Enter a keyword to search the Message, Source, Destination and Note fields of all log messages. If a match is found in any field, the log message is displayed. The keyword must consist of 163 characters including letters, numbers, and the following special characters: _() ,:;?!+-*/=#$%@

Click this button to apply the current filter settings to the log. Click this button to update the list of log messages. Clear Log Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message. This field displays the time the log message was recorded. This field displays the priority of the log message. Possible values from highest priority to lowest priority are:

any emerg (emergency) alert crit (critical) error warn (warning) notice info (information) Category Message Source Destination Protocol Note This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the Display and (other) Category fields. This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text [count=x], where x is a number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is enabled and multiple entries were combined in the log message. This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the log message. This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated the log message. This field displays the service protocol in the event that generated the log message. This field displays any additional information about the log message. NAP Series Users Guide 37 C H A P T E R 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LED NAP Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Connections Resetting the NAP 6.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED The NAP does not turn on. The LED is not on. 1 Make sure you are using the power adapter included with the NAP or a PoE power injector/switch. 2 Make sure the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch is connected to the NAP and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector/switch. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. If none of these steps work, you may have faulty hardware and should contact your NAP vendor. 4 5 The LED does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 15. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adapter or PoE power injector to the NAP. NAP Series Users Guide 38 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 6.3 NAP Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the NAP. 1 2 3 5 6 The default static IP address is 192.168.1.2. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 6.6 on page 43. If your NAP is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. If the NCC has managed the NAP, you can also check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access Point screen for the NAP's current LAN IP address. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default static IP address is 192.168.1.2. If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the NAP. for the NAP's current LAN IP address. If the NCC has managed the NAP, you can check the NCC's AP > Monitor > Access Point screen 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 15. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NAP. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NAP, skip this step.) If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computers IP address is in the same subnet as the NAP. Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NAP with the default IP address. See Section 6.6 on page 43. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. NAP Series Users Guide 39 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Advanced Suggestions I forgot the password. If your computer is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port. 1 2 The default password is 1234. If the NAP is connected to the NCC and registered, check the NCC for the password. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 6.6 on page 43. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NAP. 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. This fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector to the NAP. 3 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 6.6 on page 43. The NAP is already registered with NCC but it cannot connect to the NCC. 1 Check your networks firewall settings. Make sure the following TCP ports are allowed: 443, 4335, and 6667. 2 Check your networks VLAN settings (see Section 4.3 on page 31). You may have to change the Management VLAN settings of the NAP to allow it to connect to the Internet and access the NCC. Note: Changing the management VLAN and IP address settings on the NAP also pushes these changes to the NCC. Do this only if your device cannot otherwise connect to the NCC. 3 Make sure your NAP doesnt have to go through network authentication such as a captive portal. If your network uses a captive portal, the network administrator may have to create a new VLAN without this requirement. Change your NAPs management VLAN settings as necessary. 6.4 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. NAP Series Users Guide 40 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 6.2 on page 38. 2 Make sure the NAP is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and your computer is set to obtain a dynamic IP address. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings on the wireless client are the same as the settings on the NAP. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NAP), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 15. Reboot the NAP. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LED, and check Section 1.6 on page 15. If the NAP is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal is weak, try moving the NAP closer to the NAP (if possible), and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network

(microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Reboot the NAP. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. 2 3 1 3 4 6.5 Wireless Connections I cannot access the NAP or ping any computer from the WLAN. NAP Series Users Guide 41 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure the wireless LAN (wireless radio) is enabled on the NAP. 2 Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NAPs active radio. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NAP. 5 Check that both the NAP and your computer are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN. WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2-PSK is recommended. The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified. If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. Change the RADIUS servers configuration if you need to use a different re-authentication timer setting. How do I remove the NAP203 or NAP303 indoor AP from its mounting bracket?

Find the down arrow close to the Ethernet ports, then use a thin flat tool (for example, a flat screw driver) to lift up a clip beneath the down arrow. NAP Series Users Guide 42 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Turn the NAP203 or NAP303 indoor AP counter-clockwise. Detach the NAP203 or NAP303 indoor AP from the mounting bracket. 6.6 Resetting the NAP If you cannot access the NAP by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and then on again. If you still cannot access the NAP by any method or you forget the administrator password(s), you can reset the NAP to its factory-default settings. Any configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the NAP should still be available afterwards. Use the following procedure to reset the NAP to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file. Note: This procedure removes the current configuration. 1 Make sure the Power LED is on and not blinking. NAP Series Users Guide 43 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Press the RESET button and hold it until the Power LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about ten seconds.) 2 3 Release the RESET button, and wait for the NAP to restart. You should be able to access the NAP using the default settings. 6.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions. NAP Series Users Guide 44 A P P E N D I X A Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the device. See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp. https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/

India Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/

Kazakhstan Zyxel Kazakhstan https://www.zyxel.kz NAP Series Users Guide 45 Appendix A Customer Support Korea Zyxel Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines Zyxel Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/

Vietnam Belarus Zyxel BY Belgium https://www.zyxel.by Zyxel Communications B.V. https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Europe NAP Series Users Guide 46 Appendix A Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria Zyxel https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/

Denmark Zyxel Communications A/S https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/

Estonia Zyxel Estonia https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/

France Zyxel France https://www.zyxel.fr Germany Zyxel Deutschland GmbH https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/

Hungary Zyxel Hungary & SEE https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/

Italy Zyxel Communications Italy https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/

Latvia Zyxel Latvia https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/

NAP Series Users Guide 47 Appendix A Customer Support Lithuania Zyxel Lithuania https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/

Netherlands Zyxel Benelux https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/

Norway Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/

Poland Zyxel Communications Poland https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/

Romania Zyxel Romania https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia Zyxel Russia Slovakia https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/

https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/

Spain Zyxel Communications ES Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/

Sweden Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/

Switzerland Studerus AG https://www.zyxel.ch/de https://www.zyxel.ch/fr Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka NAP Series Users Guide 48 Appendix A Customer Support South America Turkey Zyxel Turkey A.S. https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/

UK Zyxel Communications UK Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/

Ukraine Zyxel Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Argentina Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Brazil Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda. https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Colombia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Ecuador Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

South America Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Middle East Israel Zyxel Communications Corporation http://il.zyxel.com/

NAP Series Users Guide 49 Appendix A Customer Support Middle East Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

North America USA Oceania Africa Australia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/

NAP Series Users Guide 50 A P P E N D I X B Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2020 by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation. Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimers Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Your use of the NAP is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. Trademarks Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA The following information applies if you use the product within USA area. FCC EMC Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance The following information applies if you use the product with RF function within USA area. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm (NAP102, NAP203, NAP303) or 30 cm (NAP353) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Country Code selection feature to be disabled for products marketed to the US/CANADA. Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only, except for relevant user's manual mention that this device can be installed into the external environment. (NAP353 is a device for outdoor use.) BRAZIL The following applies if you use the product within Brazil. Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. NAP Series Users Guide 51 Appendix B Legal Information CANADA The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area. Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 statement This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's license-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This radio transmitter (2468C-NWA5123AC (NAP102), 2468C-WAC6503DS (NAP303), 2468C-WAC6553DE (NAP353), 2468C-WAC6103DI

(NAP203)) has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. ANTENNA MODEL NO. CONNECTOR 2.4 G GAIN 5 G GAIN REMARK Antenna Information NAP102 2.4 GHz Antenna NAP102 5 GHz Antenna NAP303 NAP203 NAP353 ZXL04-22008A SINBON / 2.4 G & 5 G Metal & PCB Antenna TYPE PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Dipole PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Loop Loop Loop IPEX N type U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL Dipole U.FL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.08 (2400-2483.5MHz) 3.07 (2400-2483.5MHz) 4 4.5 3.28 3.37 3.15 4.33 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.91 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725-5850 MHz) 6 7 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.23 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.36 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz) 5.20 (5725-5850 MHz) Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8 If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid, The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; and Where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna models(s), and the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.23 of RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated. If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz, the following attention must be paid. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. L'metteur/rcepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Le prsent metteur radio (2468C-NWA5123AC (NAP102), 2468C-WAC6503DS (NAP303), 2468C-WAC6553DE (NAP353), 2468C-WAC6103DI

(NAP203)) a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. NAP Series Users Guide 52 Appendix B Legal Information MODELE D'ANTENNE NOMBRE CONNECTEUR 2.4 G GAIN 5 G GAIN REMARQUE NAP353 ZXL04-22008A Dipole N type Informations Antenne NAP102 2.4 GHz Antenna NAP102 5 GHz Antenna NAP303 NAP203 SINBON / 2.4 G & 5 G Metal & PCB Antenna 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PIFA U.FL Dipole IPEX TYPE PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Loop U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL U.FL Loop U.FL Loop U.FL Dipole U.FL 3.08 (2400-2483.5MHz) 3.07 (2400-2483.5MHz) 4 4.5 3.28 3.37 3.15 4.33 4.06 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.91 (5725-5850 MHz) 3.99 (5150-5250 MHz) 3.79 (5725-5850 MHz) 6 7 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.23 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.31 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.22 (5725-5850 MHz) 4.38 (5150-5250 MHz) 4.36 (5725-5850 MHz) 5.12 (5150-5250 MHz) 5.20 (5725-5850 MHz) Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 3 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 1, 2, 4 Ceiling Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 7 Wall Mounted:

Antenna 5, 6, 8 Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande de 5 150 5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

Pour les dispositifs munis d'antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie, selon le cas;

Lorsqu'il y a lieu, les types d'antennes (s'il y en a plusieurs), les numros de modle de l'antenne et les pires angles d'inclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme l'exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d'lvation, nonce la section 6.2.2.3 du CNR-247, doivent tre clairement indiqus. Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes. Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e.. Industry Canada radiation exposure statement This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm (NAP102, NAP203, NAP303) between the radiator and your body. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 30 cm (NAP353) between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm (NAP102, NAP203, NAP303) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm (NAP353) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Caution:

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-

5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.

(v) NAP353 is an outdoor device and only uses 5G Band 4 (5725-5850 MHz). NAP Series Users Guide 53 Appendix B Legal Information Avertissement:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--

d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.

(v) NAP353 est un appareil exterieur et seulement utilise 5G Bane 4 (5725-5850 MHz). EUROPEAN UNION The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) Compliance information for wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). And this product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below table:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. Zyxel recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for the 5GHz wireless LANs. If this device for operation in the band 5150-5350 MHz, it is for indoor use only. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radio equipment and your body. The maximum RF power operating for each band as follows:

NAP102 NAP303 NAP353 NAP203 The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 97.95 mW, The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 199.07 mW, The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 743.02 mW. The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 99.54 mW, The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 183.65 mW, The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 941.89 mW. The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.26 mW, The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 198.61 mW, The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 995.41 mW. The band 2,400 to 2,483.5 MHz is 92.68 mW, The bands 5,150 MHz to 5,350 MHz is 192.75 mW, The 5,470 MHz to 5,725 MHz is 966.05 mW.

(Bulgarian) Zyxel , 2014/53/C. National Restrictions The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Por medio de la presente Zyxel declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 2014/53/UE.. Zyxel tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 2014/53/EU. Espaol

(Spanish) etina

(Czech) NAP Series Users Guide 54 Appendix B Legal Information Deutsch

(German) Eesti keel

(Estonian)

(Greek) English Franais

(French) Hrvatski

(Croatian) slenska

(Icelandic) Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede Zyxel erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 2014/53/EU. National Restrictions In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Hiermit erklrt Zyxel, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Zyxel seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 2014/53/EU phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Zyxel 2014/53/EU. Hereby, Zyxel declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Par la prsente Zyxel dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 2014/53/EU. Zyxel ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU. Hr me lsir, Zyxel v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 2014/53/

EU. Italiano (Italian) Con la presente Zyxel dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 2014/53/EU. National Restrictions This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Ar o Zyxel deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 2014/53/EU btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Latvieu valoda

(Latvian) National Restrictions The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk check http://www.esd.lv for more details. informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Lietuvi kalba

(Lithuanian) iuo Zyxel deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 2014/53/EU Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar

(Hungarian) Alulrott, Zyxel nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 2014/53/EU irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, Zyxel, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 2014/53/EU. Nederlands

(Dutch) Hierbij verklaart Zyxel dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 2014/53/EU. Polski (Polish) Niniejszym Zyxel owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 2014/53/EU. Portugus

(Portuguese) Zyxel declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 2014/53/

EU. Prin prezenta, Zyxel declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 2014/53/EU. Zyxel tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 2014/53/EU. Zyxel izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 2014/53/EU. Suomi (Finnish) Zyxel vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska

(Swedish) Hrmed intygar Zyxel att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 2014/53/EU. Norsk

(Norwegian) Erklrer herved Zyxel at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 2014/53/EU. Romn

(Romanian) Slovenina

(Slovak) Slovenina

(Slovene) Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in those countries. NAP Series Users Guide 55 Appendix B Legal Information 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE Czech Republic Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia AT BE BG HR CY CR DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United Kingdom LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SK SI ES SE CH TR GB Professional installation instruction (NAP353) Instructions d'installation professionnelle (NAP353) Please be advised that due to the unique function supplied by this product, the device is intended for use with our interactive entertainment software and licensed third-party only. The product will be distributed through controlled distribution channel and installed by trained professional and will not be sold directly to the general public through retail store. Installation personal This product is designed for specific application and needs to be installed by a qualified personal who has RF and related rule knowledge. The general user shall not attempt to install or change the setting. Installation location The product shall be installed at a location where the radiating antenna can be kept 30 cm from nearby person in normal operation condition to meet regulatory RF exposure requirement. External antenna Use only the antennas which have been approved by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The non-approved antenna(s) may produce unwanted spurious or excessive RF transmitting power which may lead to the violation of FCC/IC limit and is prohibited. Installation procedure Please refer to user's manual for the detail. Warning Please carefully select the installation position and make sure that the final output power does not exceed the limit set force in relevant rules. The violation of the rule could lead to serious federal penalty. Veuillez noter que l'appareil etant dedie a une fonction unique, il doit etre utilise avec notre logiciel proprietaire de divertissement interactif . Ce produit sera propose par un reseau de distribution controle et installe par des professionels; il ne sera pas propose au grand public par le reseau de la grande distribution. Installation Ce produit est destine a un usage specifique et doit etre installe par un personnel qualifie maitrisant les radiofrequences et les regles s'y rapportant. L'installation et les reglages ne doivent pas etre modifies par l'utilisateur final. Emplacement d'installation En usage normal, afin de respecter les exigences reglementaires concernant l'exposition aux radiofrequences, ce produit doit etre installe de facon a respecter une distance de 30 cm entre l'antenne emettrice et les personnes. Antenn externe. Utiliser uniiquement les antennes approuvees par le fabricant. L'utilisation d'autres antennes peut conduire a un niveau de rayonnement essentiel ou non essentiel depassant les niveaux limites definis par FCC/IC, ce qui est interdit. Procedure d'installation Consulter le manuel d'utilisation. Avertissement Choisir avec soin la position d'installation et s'assurer que la puissance de sortie ne depasse pas les limites en vigueur. La violation de cette regle peut conduire a de serieuses penalites federales. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 NAP Series Users Guide 56 Appendix B Legal Information Safety Warnings Environment statement Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the device and the power source; repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. (NAP303, Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. The PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors. This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intrieure exclusivement). (NAP303, NAP203 and NAP102) FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES) Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all Wi-Fi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,

- For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

- For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible. a power outlet. or cord. NAP203 and NAP102) antenna(s). ErP (Energy-related Products) (NAP303 and NAP102) Zyxel products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/

125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive

(Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.

(Wireless settings, please refer to the chapter about wireless settings chapter for more detail.) European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development. Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gem den rtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmll entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natrliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schtzen. El smbolo de abajo indica que segn las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batera debern depositarse como basura separada de la domstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida til, llvelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el producto, la recogida por separado ste y/o su batera ayudar a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y medioambiental. Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les rglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent tre limins sparment des ordures mnagres. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte spare de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera conomiser les ressources naturelles et protger l'environnement et la sant humaine. Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana. Symbolen innebr att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat frn hushllsavfallet. Nr den hr produkten nr slutet av sin livslngd ska du ta den till en tervinningsstation. Vid tiden fr kasseringen bidrar du till en bttre milj och mnsklig hlsa genom att gra dig av med den p ett tervinningsstlle. NAP Series Users Guide 57 Appendix B Legal Information NCC Statement:

1) 20 cm MPE (MPE) 1 mW/cm2 0.539 mW/cm2 for NAP102 MPE (MPE) 1 mW/cm2 0.756 mW/cm2 for NAP203 MPE (MPE) 1 mW/cm2 0.872 mW/cm2 for NAP303 2) 30 cm MPE (MPE) 1 mW/cm2 0.539 mW/cm2 for NAP353

(NAP353)

( : / 110V AC 230V AC)

NAP Series Users Guide 58 Appendix B Legal Information About the Symbols Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents. Explanation of the Symbols SYMBOL EXPLANATION Alternating current (AC):

AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction. DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers. A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor. Direct current (DC):

Earth; ground:

Class II equipment:

The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or reinforced insulation. Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Open Source Licenses Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com. This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or Zyxel Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. NAP Series Users Guide 59 Index Index access 21 certifications viewing 59 channel 8 CLI 10 commands 10 comparison table 7 configuration information 34 Contact Information 45 cookies 21 copyright 51 Customer Support 45 diagnostics 34 disclaimer 51 dual radios 8 dual-radio application 8 ESSID 42 A C D E F IEEE 802.1Q 32 interference 8 Internet Explorer 21 IP Address 29 gateway IP address 29 IP subnet 29 FTP 10 I J Java L logout logs 35 M permissions 21 JavaScripts 21 LEDs 15 Blinking 16, 18 Flashing 16, 18 Web Configurator 23 managing the device good habits 15 using FTP. See FTP. message bar 25 messages warning 25 FCC interference statement 51 Firefox 21 NAP Series Users Guide 60 NCC. See Nebula Control Center Nebula Control Center 9 Netscape Navigator 21 trademarks 51 troubleshooting 34 N O P R S overview 7 pop-up windows 21 port, uplink 16, 18, 20 product registration 59 radio 8 registration product 59 reset 43 RESET button 43 RF interference 8 screen resolution 21 setting, IP 29 shell scripts downloading 34 managing 33 uploading 34 status 26 status bar 25 warning message popup 25 supported browsers 21 Index T V W Virtual Local Area Network 31 VLAN 31 introduction 31 warning message popup 25 warranty 59 note 59 Web Configurator 9, 21 access 21 requirements 21 supported browsers 21 wireless channel 42 wireless LAN 42 wireless security 42 WLAN interface 8 Z ZDP 10 ZON Utility 10 ZON utility 7 ZyXEL Discovery Protocol 10 Zyxel One Network 7 NAP Series Users Guide 61

Dimensions/

Colors Printed/

LENGTH WIDTH 39.5 mm x 23 mm Diecut display only PANTONE BLACK Communications Corporation Model Number

: NAP203

: 802.11ac Dual-Radio Nebula Cloud Managed Access Point/

() 802.11ac Power Rating Power Consumption: 12.5 Watt

: PoE Input 48-54V ,0.46A Max. FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA IC: 2468C-WAC6103DIA

() EX::

. Designed by Zyxel in Taiwan. Made in Taiwan. Note:

1. Font : Galano Grotesque 2. Chinese Font :

3. Material

: POLYESTER WHITE #75 ICON DIMENSION 4.83x7.0mm 5x3.88mm 4.8x7.18mm 7x5mm 7x5mm 5x5mm Date/

Designed/

Part Name/

Models Name/

Artwork Number/

Graphic Layout Scale/

Rev./

04 Jun. 20 jane SPEC LABEL 3264274103 1:1 Unit:mm 03 THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED AS THE BASIS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR SELL OF APPARATUSES OR DEVICES WITHOUT PERMISSION. A artwork design NAP203-EU Comment/

Dimensions/

Colors Printed/

LENGTH WIDTH 39.5 mm x 23 mm Diecut display only PANTONE BLACK

() EX::

. Designed by Zyxel in Taiwan. Made in Taiwan. Communications Corporation Model Number

: NWA1123-AC PRO

: 802.11ac Power Rating

: PoE Input 48-54V ,0.46A Max. Power Consumption: 12.5 Watt

() FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA IC: 2468C-WAC6103DIA MSIP-CMM-ZXC

-WAC6103D-I Note:

1. Font : Galano Grotesque 2. Chinese Font :

3. Material

: POLYESTER WHITE #75 ICON DIMENSION 4.83x7.0mm 5.23x6.95mm 5x3.88mm 4.8x7.18mm 7x5mm 7x5mm 5x5mm Date/

Designed/

Part Name/

Models Name/

Artwork Number/

Graphic Layout Scale/

Rev./

04 Jun. 20 jane SPEC LABEL NWA1123AC-ECO-EU 3264288204 1:1 Unit:mm 04 THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED AS THE BASIS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR SELL OF APPARATUSES OR DEVICES WITHOUT PERMISSION. Comment/

A artwork design Dimensions/

Colors Printed/

LENGTH WIDTH 39.5 mm x 23 mm Diecut display only PANTONE BLACK

() EX::

. Designed by Zyxel in Taiwan. Made in Taiwan. Communications Corporation Model Number

: WAC6103D-I

: 802.11ac Power Rating

: PoE Input 48-54V ,0.46A Max. Power Consumption: 12.5 Watt

() FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA IC: 2468C-WAC6103DIA MSIP-CMM-ZXC

-WAC6103D-I Note:

1. Font : Galano Grotesque 2. Chinese Font :

3. Material

: POLYESTER WHITE #75 ICON DIMENSION 4.83x7.0mm 5.23x6.95mm 5x3.88mm 4.8x7.18mm 7x5mm 7x5mm 5x5mm Date/

Designed/

Part Name/

Models Name/

Artwork Number/

Graphic Layout Scale/

Rev./

04 Jun. 20 jane SPEC LABEL WAC6103D-I-US-R 3264248705 1:1 Unit:mm 05 THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED AS THE BASIS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR SELL OF APPARATUSES OR DEVICES WITHOUT PERMISSION. Comment/

A artwork design FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA IC: 2468C-WAC6103DIA

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan, R.O.C Date: May 19, 2020 Subject: Ad Hoc Mode Function Declaration FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA IC ID: 2468C-WAC6103DIA To Whom it may concern, We, Zyxel Communications Corporation declare that the device does not support any non-US channels and country code selection in all the operational mode(s). Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan, R.O.C Date: 2020/5/19 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA Point, 802.11ac Dual-Radio Dual-Mount PoE Access Point To whom it may concern:

Product name: 802.11 ac Unified Pro Access Point, 802.11ac Dual-Radio Nebula Cloud Managed Access We the undersigned, hereby authorize following person to act as our agent in the preparation of an application for equipment authorization of model WAC6103D-I, NAP203, NWA1123-AC PRO to the FCC Rules and Regulations. International Certification Corp. Name

: Gary Chang Job Title

: Manager e-mail

: garychang@icertifi.com.tw Webs Address

: No.3-1, Lane 6, Wen San 3rd St. Kwei Shan Dist., TaoYuan City 333, Taiwan (R.O.C.) We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002(b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This appointment also includes the authority to complete FCC Form 731 on our behalf and sign the application as an authorized agent. Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan, R.O.C Product Equality declaration Letter We, Zyxel Communications Corporation declare that difference between FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-I / I88WAC6103D-IA are only changed filter, power amplifier of 2.4GHz. Wireless function Frequency band 2.4GHz Antenna 5GHz Antenna Characteristic FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-I 2412 ~ 2462 MHz 5180 ~ 5240 MHz 5745 ~ 5825 MHz 2412 ~ 2462 MHz 5180 ~ 5240 MHz 5745 ~ 5825 MHz PIFA Dipole LOOP Dipole PIFA Dipole LOOP Dipole Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Date: May 19, 2020 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: I88WAC6103D-IA To whom it may concern:

Short-term confidentiality Internal Photographs External Photographs User's manual Test Set up photo Permanent confidentiality Block Diagram Schematics Operational Description Bill of Materials Tune up procedure Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions pubic notice, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after issue date. Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant Hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application As outlined below:

The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter.